JP2014108332A - Game machine, game system, and dispenser - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To reduce such a case that a player forgets to acquire game history.SOLUTION: The game machine generates a two-dimensional code as the game history of a player and displays it on a liquid crystal display, not only when the player performs an operation to select "creation of two-dimensional code" on a main menu screen after the player inputs a password that has been issued by a management server and acquired by a portable terminal that the player possesses, or after the player selects "a simplified start", but also when the player operates a settlement switch for settling credit as a game value.

Description

  The present invention allows a player to perform a predetermined game using a game value and can output information related to the player's game history in a predetermined manner and a storage medium owned by the player. The present invention relates to a gaming system comprising a lending device that outputs a gaming value lending request to the gaming machine using the valuable value.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a slot machine that can output information on a player's gaming history, and a management device such as a server that updates and manages gaming history information for each player based on the output information; A gaming system consisting of is known.

  In the conventional gaming system, the player operates the gaming machine at the start and end of the game, and includes game history information related to the player's game history and a URL indicating the location of the WEB site of the management device. A two-dimensional code indicating information is output. The player uses the mobile phone to read the two-dimensional code, and based on the URL, performs wireless communication via the wide area network to access the management device, and the player's game history information Send. The management device holds game information (game history information) related to the game history for each player, and updates the content of the game information of the player based on the received game history information.

  In addition, the player uses a mobile phone to access the management device and receives a password generated based on the player's game history information. In the next game, the player inputs the password to the gaming machine, regardless of whether it is the same gaming machine or the same gaming store (hall) in the previous gaming. The result of the game can be reflected in the current gaming machine and played. This makes it possible to show other players the degree to which the model is being exchanged, or to customize the content of the production to a desired aspect. Therefore, the superiority and interest of the player can be improved, and the game frequency of the model can be expected to increase.

  As such a gaming system, a game history is output as a two-dimensional barcode by operating each stop switch or effect switch of a slot machine as a game ending operation by a player (for example, Patent Document 1). In Patent Document 1, a main menu screen for linking with the management server is displayed by simultaneous operation of the left and right stop switches, and the “2D code” menu item is selected by operating the left and right stop switches. When a switch or the like is operated, a two-dimensional bar code is displayed, so that a player can collect a game history with a mobile phone or the like.

JP 2012-61067 A

  In the technique described in Patent Document 1, there is a possibility that the game history may be missed if the player forgets to end the game when the game is ended.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine, a gaming system, and a lending device that reduce a player from forgetting to acquire a gaming history.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention provides:
A predetermined game using a player's game value (for example, medals, coins, game balls, credits stored in a storage medium, etc.) is enabled and the player's game history (for example, total number of games, medals) Game history information regarding the total number of payouts, number of BBs, number of RBs, number of consecutive winning bonuses, history of achievement missions, history of executed premier effects, level, experience value, effect settings, 6-choice SP replay information) A gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1 or pachinko gaming machine 700) capable of outputting information (for example, information shown in FIGS. 38B and 38C) in a predetermined mode (for example, a two-dimensional code),
Information including the game history information in accordance with a predetermined end operation by the player (for example, operation of the stop switches 8L and 8R and the effect switch 56 for selecting “2D code creation” shown in FIG. 29B). Game history output means for outputting in a predetermined manner (for example, the processing of steps S2801 to S2815 executed by the sub CPU 91a),
Storage means (for example, a function for storing credits in the RAM 41c) for storing game values owned by the player;
In response to a predetermined value return operation by the player (for example, an operation to select the settlement switch 10), the storage unit cancels the storage and the value return unit (for example, returns the gaming value stored in the storage unit) , And a function to settle medals memorized as credits)
The game history output means outputs information including the game history information when the game value is returned by the value return means (for example, processing of steps S2754 and S2801 to S2815 executed by the sub CPU 91a).
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a configuration, if the player performs a value return operation, information including the game history information is also output, so that the player does not fail to output the game history information when the player ends the game. As a result, it is possible to reduce a player's forgetting to acquire a game history, to reduce a decrease in interest of the player due to forgetting to acquire a game history, and to effectively use the acquired game history The fun of gaming is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
Notification means for notifying that information including the game history information is output by the game history output means when the game value is returned by the value return means (for example, processing in step S2753 executed by the sub CPU 91a) ) May be further provided.

  According to such a configuration, if the player performs a value return operation, it is notified that information including the game history information is output, so that it is possible to further reduce the player from forgetting to acquire the game history.

(3) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming system according to the second aspect of the present invention provides:
A predetermined game using a player's game value (for example, medals, coins, game balls, credits stored in a storage medium, etc.) is enabled and the player's game history (for example, total number of games, medals) Game history information regarding the total number of payouts, number of BBs, number of RBs, number of consecutive winning bonuses, history of achievement missions, history of executed premier effects, level, experience value, effect settings, 6-choice SP replay information) A gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1 or pachinko gaming machine 700) capable of outputting information (for example, information shown in FIGS. 38B and 38C) in a predetermined mode (for example, a two-dimensional code), and a player A lending device (for example, a card unit) that outputs a gaming value lending request to the gaming machine using the valuable value stored in a storage medium (for example, a prepaid card) owned by And 810), a gaming system (e.g., a gaming system 1001),
The gaming machine is
A payout means for paying out the game value in response to the lending request (for example, a function of paying out a game ball according to the value specified from the prepaid card inserted in the card insertion slot);
Information including the game history information in accordance with a predetermined end operation by the player (for example, operation of the stop switches 8L and 8R and the effect switch 56 for selecting “2D code creation” shown in FIG. 29B). Game history output means for outputting in a predetermined manner (for example, the processing of steps S2801 to S2815 executed by the sub CPU 91a),
The lending device is
Provided with a medium return means (for example, a function of returning a prepaid card inserted into a card insertion slot) for returning the storage medium in response to a predetermined medium return operation (for example, an operation for selecting a card return switch) by a player ,
The game history output means outputs information including the game history information when the storage medium is returned by the medium return means (for example, processing of steps S2754 and S2801 to S2815 executed by the sub CPU 91a).
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a configuration, when the player performs a medium return operation, information including the game history information is also output, so that the player does not fail to output the game history information when the player ends the game. As a result, it is possible to reduce a player's forgetting to acquire a game history, to reduce a decrease in interest of the player due to forgetting to acquire a game history, and to effectively use the acquired game history The fun of gaming is improved.

(4) In the gaming system of (3) above,
When the storage medium is returned by the medium return means, notification means for notifying that information including the game history information is output by the game history output means (for example, processing of step S2753 executed by the sub CPU 91a) ) May be further provided.

  According to such a configuration, if the player performs a medium return operation, it is notified that information including the game history information is output, so that it is possible to further reduce the player from forgetting to acquire the game history.

(5) In the gaming system of (3) or (4) above,
A management device (for example, a management server 1200) that manages game information (for example, information shown in FIG. 40 (a)) about the gaming machine for each registered player;
The gaming machine is
From a predetermined start operation (for example, operation of stop switches 8L and 8R for selecting “Easy Start” on the main menu screen before the game start and the effect switch 56) by the player to a predetermined end operation (for example, “Easy Start” The game history generating means (for example, the sub CPU 91a) generates the game history information up to the stop switches 8L and 8R for selecting “2D code creation” on the main menu screen after selection and the operation of the effect switch 56). And the processing of step S2808 to be executed)
The management device
Update determination means for determining whether or not to update the game information when the game history acquisition means acquires the game history information (for example, steps S3103, S3104, S3106, S3108, and S3109 executed by the control unit 210) Processing)
The game information update unit updates the game information based on the game history information when the update determination unit determines to update the game information (for example, steps S3110 to S3113 executed by the control unit 210). )
When other game history information is acquired after one game history information by the game history acquisition means (for example, when a simple start update request is newly received after game information is updated by an easy start update request), the other Specific game history included in the game history information (for example, the total number of games, the number of BBs and the number of RBs included in the last received simple start update request), and date / time information related to acquisition of the one game history information (for example, The relationship (for example, the last received date and time of the simple start update request) and the date and time information related to the acquisition of the other game history information (for example, the last received date and time of the simple start update request). From the reception date and time of the simple start update request that updated the player database to the reception date and time of the last received simple start update request For example, the time per game obtained from the total number of games and time is 4.1 [seconds / game] or more, and the number of BBs and RBs within the time When the number of games is not more than a preset number, the number of games until winning BB and RB is more than a preset number, and the number of consecutive winnings of BB and RB is less than a preset number) The update determination means may determine not to update the game information for the other game history information (for example, the process of step S3108 executed by the control unit 210).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the game information is updated based on the date and time information when the management device acquires the game history information, and the game history information includes the date and time information related to the acquisition of the game history information. There is no need, the amount of game history information can be reduced, and the load for the game machine to generate game history information can be reduced.

(6) In the gaming system of (3) to (5) above,
A management device (for example, a management server 1200) that manages game information (for example, information shown in FIG. 40 (a)) about the gaming machine for each registered player;
The management device
Game history acquisition means for acquiring the game history information (for example, the processing of steps S2903 and S2905 executed by the control unit 210);
Based on the game history information acquired by the game history acquisition means, game information update means for updating the game information (for example, processing of steps S3101 to S3119 executed by the control unit 210 and processing of steps S3201 to S3216); ,
In response to a player's request, key data issuing means for issuing key data (for example, a password) generated based on game information corresponding to the player (for example, processing in steps S3501 to S3504 executed by the control unit 210) ) And
The gaming machine is
A key data receiving means (for example, the processing of steps S2401 to S2416 executed by the sub CPU 91a) for receiving the input of the key data from the player;
An effect execution means (for example, a sub CPU 91a corresponding to the type of command received from the game control board 40) executes an effect in any one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, effect patterns) set in advance. A process of performing output control of the rendering device such as the liquid crystal display 51, the rendering effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 with reference to the control pattern);
Production mode changing means (for example, processing of steps S2406 and S2501 to S2506 executed by the sub CPU 91a) for changing the production mode of the production executed by the production execution means,
The management device and the gaming machine are generated by the management device, and the management device and the gaming machine are updated synchronously according to a predetermined rule (for example, based on a synchronous update data specification table shown in FIG. 45). Synchronous update data (for example, “number of mission clears”, “number of members”, “maximum number of balls”, “maximum number of consecutive resorts”, “number of premier performances”, “number of server accesses” shown in FIG. 45) ”,“ Number of mini-games ”),
The key data issuing means includes the key data (for example, the setting data based on the game information, and the specific data capable of specifying the synchronous update data stored in the management device different from the effect setting data) 34 (b), a password including the 6-bit production setting and 3-bit specific data shown in FIG. 66),
The effect mode change means is extracted from the key data and first change means for changing the effect mode based on the effect setting data extracted from the key data (for example, the process of step S2410 executed by the sub CPU 91a). Second changing means (for example, processing of steps S2501 to S2506 executed by the sub CPU 91a) for changing the effect mode based on the specific data,
When the second changing means determines that the result of comparing the specific data extracted from the key data received by the key data receiving means and the synchronous update data stored in the gaming machine is normal (For example, when it is determined that the value of the specific data extracted from the password is greater than or equal to the value stored in the gaming machine), the effect mode is changed based on the specific data (for example, the synchronous update shown in FIG. 27) Depending on the content of the synchronous update data based on the data specification table and the value of the specific data, the demonstration pattern of the demonstration effect can be changed, the executable premier effect can be added, or the selection pattern of the executable effect pattern can be selected May be changed).

  According to such a configuration, since the key data issued from the management device includes the specific data of the synchronous update data generated by the management device, the gaming machine receives the key data input from the player. Thus, the effect mode can be changed based on the specific data, and the effect mode can be changed more effectively than automatically changing the effect mode at a preset timing.

(7) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention provides:
A predetermined game using a player's game value (for example, medals, coins, game balls, credits stored in a storage medium, etc.) is enabled and the player's game history (for example, total number of games, medals) Game history information regarding the total number of payouts, number of BBs, number of RBs, number of consecutive winning bonuses, history of achievement missions, history of executed premier effects, level, experience value, effect settings, 6-choice SP replay information) A gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1 or pachinko gaming machine 700) capable of outputting information (for example, information shown in FIGS. 38B and 38C) in a predetermined mode (for example, a two-dimensional code),
Responding to the lending request by a lending device (for example, card unit 810) that outputs a lending request for gaming value to the gaming machine using the valuable value stored in the storage medium (for example, prepaid card) owned by the player A payout means (for example, a function of paying out a game ball according to a value specified from a prepaid card inserted in a card insertion slot),
Information including the game history information in accordance with a predetermined end operation by the player (for example, operation of the stop switches 8L and 8R and the effect switch 56 for selecting “2D code creation” shown in FIG. 29B). Game history output means for outputting in a predetermined manner (for example, the processing of steps S2801 to S2815 executed by the sub CPU 91a),
The game history output means outputs information including the game history information when the lending device returns the storage medium in response to a predetermined medium return operation by the player (for example, a step executed by the sub CPU 91a) (Processing of S2754, S2801 to S2815)
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the same effect as the gaming system of (3) above can be achieved.

(8) To achieve the above object, a lending device according to the fourth aspect of the present invention provides:
A predetermined game using a player's game value (for example, medals, coins, game balls, credits stored in a storage medium, etc.) is enabled and the player's game history (for example, total number of games, medals) Game history information regarding the total number of payouts, number of BBs, number of RBs, number of consecutive winning bonuses, history of achievement missions, history of executed premier effects, level, experience value, effect settings, 6-choice SP replay information) For a gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1 or pachinko gaming machine 700) that can output information (for example, information shown in FIGS. 38B and 38C) in a predetermined mode (for example, a two-dimensional code). A lending device (for example, a card unit 81) that outputs a gaming value lending request using a valuable value stored in a storage medium (for example, a prepaid card) owned by the player. ) Comprising,
In order for the gaming machine to output information including the gaming history information in response to a predetermined medium return operation (for example, an operation to select a card return switch) by the player, the storage medium is stored in response to the medium return operation. A medium return means for returning (for example, a function of returning a prepaid card inserted into the card insertion slot) is provided.

  According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the same effect as the gaming system of (3) above can be achieved.

It is a figure showing the whole game system composition concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a portable terminal. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the management server to which the management apparatus which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention is applied. It is a front view of the slot machine to which the gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention is applied. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the slot machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of special combination, the symbol combination of a special combination, and a special combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of small combination, the symbol combination of a small combination, and a small combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of re-game player, the symbol combination of a re-game player, and a re-game player. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the symbol combination of a transfer event, and a transfer event. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a gaming state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for every game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for every game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for every game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the lottery object combination read as a lottery object role for every game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the combination of the combination which a prize is permitted by a lottery object combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of several re-game player winning. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of several small part winning. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the lottery conditions used as the opportunity which performs AT lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the table referred in AT lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the janken chance performed during RB. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the table referred in game number lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the table referred in lottery mode lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of the no navigation area in RT3, a part navigation area, and all the navigation areas. It is a figure which shows the transition condition of the no navigation area in RT3, a part navigation area, and all the navigation areas. It is a figure which shows the experience value provision number according to level and the number of games. (A) is a figure which shows the coin acquisition specification between games, (b) is a figure which shows the stock specification of a stock coin. It is a figure which shows the transition of a main menu screen. It is a figure which shows the hint screen of a stock coin. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating password input operation. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating password input operation. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the radar chart confirmation screen displayed after password input, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the radar chart confirmation screen displayed after simple start selection. (A) is a figure which shows a password analysis table, (b) is a figure which shows the analysis procedure of a password. It is a figure which shows an example of a bit shuffle table. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the display condition at the time of the normal production mode of a specific production area, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display situation at the time of specific production mode. It is a figure for demonstrating the output of a two-dimensional code. It is a figure which shows the information contained in a two-dimensional code. It is a figure which shows the screen at the time of stock coin acquisition lottery production. It is a figure which shows the structure of the player database with which a management server is provided, the game history database, and a privilege database. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main menu display process performed with a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main menu operation process before password input performed with a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the password input reception process performed with a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the production | presentation aspect change process performed with a slot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a synchronous update data specific table. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation screen at the time of the password of a different model being input. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the level coin related process performed with a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main menu operation process after password input performed with a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game log | history output process at the time of credit adjustment performed with a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the two-dimensional code display process performed with a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the server main process performed with a management server. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the member registration process performed with a management server. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the easy start update process performed with a management server. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the normal update process performed with a management server. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the level and experience value update process performed with a management server. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the menu selection reception process performed with a management server. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the password issuing process performed with a management server. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game provision process performed with a management server. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the item provision process performed with a management server. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen displayed on the display part of a portable terminal. It is a figure which shows the exchange of the data between a portable terminal and a management server regarding member registration. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating data exchange between the slot machine and the portable terminal, and between the portable terminal and the management server regarding easy start update. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating data exchange between the slot machine and the mobile terminal and between the mobile terminal and the management server regarding normal update. It is a figure which shows the exchange of the data between a portable terminal and a management server regarding privilege provision. It is a figure which shows the information contained in the two-dimensional code output from the slot machine to which the game machine which concerns on Embodiment 2 of this invention is applied. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a password analysis procedure according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the production | presentation aspect change process of Embodiment 2. FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine to which the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention is applied. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure in the main board | substrate with which a pachinko game machine is provided.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Embodiment 1]
FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an overall configuration of a gaming system 1001 according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming system 1001 includes a slot machine 1 to which the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is applied, and a management server 1200 to which the management device according to the first embodiment of the present invention is applied. Is done.

  The slot machine 1 is installed in a game hall (hall), and the management server 1200 is connected to the Internet network 900. Data exchange between the slot machine 1 and the management server 1200 is performed via a portable terminal 1100 having a two-dimensional code reading function and a connection function to the Internet network 900.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the mobile terminal 1100 of the present embodiment. The portable terminal 1100 includes a control unit 110, a storage unit 120, an operation unit 130, a display unit 140, a wireless communication unit 150, an antenna 151, and a camera unit 160.

  The storage unit 120 includes a nonvolatile memory such as a ROM (Read Only Memory) and a flash memory, and a semiconductor memory such as a volatile memory such as a RAM (Random Access Memory). The storage unit 120 stores programs and data such as application programs for causing the control unit 110 to execute various functions of the mobile terminal 1100.

  The operation unit 130 includes dial keys, cross operation keys, and other function keys for inputting numbers such as telephone numbers and various data, alphabets, and other characters. Alternatively, the operation unit 130 may be configured to include a touch panel. The operation unit 130 receives an operation input from the user and sends a signal related to the received operation to the control unit 110.

  The display unit 140 includes a liquid crystal display (hereinafter referred to as “LCD”). The display unit 140 may be configured by a display device such as an EL (Electro Luminescence) display. The display unit 140 displays character data and image data supplied from the control unit 110.

  The wireless communication unit 150 transmits a signal received from another mobile terminal or server via the antenna 151 to the control unit 110 and causes the antenna 151 to output a signal to be transmitted from the control unit 110 to the other mobile terminal or server.

  The camera unit 160 captures an image of a shooting target in accordance with the player's operation, converts the captured image into image data, and supplies the image data to the control unit 110. In the present embodiment, the camera unit 160 images a two-dimensional code.

  The control unit 110 includes a microprocessor (Micro Processing Unit, hereinafter referred to as “MPU”). The control unit 110 performs processing on the data from the storage unit 120, the operation unit 130, the display unit 140, the wireless communication unit 150 unit, and the camera unit 160 according to a program such as an application program stored in the storage unit 120. The processed data is supplied to the storage unit 120, the display unit 140, and the wireless communication unit 150.

  In addition to the above configuration, the mobile terminal 1100 may have a voice input / output function and an infrared communication function included in a general mobile phone.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the management server 1200. The management server 1200 has a function as a general Web server. As shown in FIG. 3, the management server 1200 includes a control unit 210, a storage unit 220, an operation unit 230, a display unit 240, and a communication unit 250. Including.

  The storage unit 220 includes a ROM, a RAM, an external storage device such as a flash memory and a hard disk drive, and the like. The storage unit 220 stores programs and data for causing the control unit 210 to execute various functions of the management server 1200.

  The operation unit 230 includes an input device such as a keyboard, a mouse, a keypad, a touch pad, and a touch panel. The operation unit 230 receives an operation input from a user such as an administrator of the management server 1200 and sends a signal related to the received operation to the control unit 210.

  The display unit 240 is configured by an LCD, for example. The display unit 240 may be configured by other display devices such as a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display or an EL display. The display unit 240 displays character data and image data supplied from the control unit 210.

  The communication unit 250 supplies data received from the mobile terminal 1100 or another server via the Internet network 900 to the control unit 210, and the data supplied from the control unit 210 is supplied to the mobile terminal via the Internet network 900. It is transmitted to 1100 or another server.

  The control unit 210 is configured by an MPU, for example. The control unit 210 processes the data from the storage unit 220, the operation unit 230, the display unit 240, and the communication unit 250 according to the program stored in the storage unit 220, and stores the processed data in the storage unit 220. The operation unit 230, the display unit 240, and the communication unit 250 are supplied. In addition, the control part 210 of this embodiment can acquire date-time data from the RTC (Real Time Clock) 211 with which the motherboard (not shown) with which MPU was attached is provided.

  Next, the slot machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. First, the structure and electrical configuration of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the slot machine 1 includes a housing 1 a whose front surface is open, and a front door 1 b that is pivotally supported at a side end of the housing 1 a. .

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter, left reel, middle reel, right reel) having a plurality of symbols arranged on the outer periphery are arranged. ) Are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 4, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. Are arranged as follows.

  As shown in FIG. 6, “black 7”, “net 7 (shaded 7 in the figure)”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “replay”, A plurality of types of mutually distinguishable symbols such as “plum”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “bell”, and “orange” are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 7), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously formed in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect a reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back side. , Is provided. The reel LED 55 includes 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and can irradiate each symbol independently.

  At the position corresponding to each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on the front door 1b, a horizontally long rectangular see-through window 3 that allows the reels 2L, 2C, 2R to be seen through from the front side is provided. The reels 2L, 2C, 2R can be visually recognized from the player side.

  The front door 1b uses a medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value). The MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting the maximum bet number (3 in any game state in this embodiment) among the prescribed number of bets determined according to the game state, is stored as credits. Settlement switch 10 operated when paying out medals used for setting medals and betting numbers (returning medals used for setting credits and betting numbers), start switch operated when starting a game 7. Stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and an effect switch 56 for use in effects. It is provided operable by the player.

  In the present embodiment, among the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that have started to rotate, the reel that stops first is referred to as a first stop reel, and the stop is referred to as a first stop. Similarly, the reel that stops second is called the second stop reel, the stop is called second stop, the reel that stops third is called the third stop reel, and the stop is the third stop. Alternatively, it is called final stop.

  The front door 1b also displays a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs, and the like. Game assist indicator 12, 1BETLED14 that notifies that the bet number is set by 1 by lighting, 2BETLED15 that notifies that the bet number is set by 2 and 2 that the bet number is set by 3 3BET LED 16 to notify, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted by lighting, start effective LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (the previous game start) Waiting for the start of reel rotation because a certain period has not elapsed since Weight in LED19 for notifying by lighting a a is that during the game display section 13 in the replay LED20 is provided for informing is provided by lighting the effect that during replay game, which will be described later.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 7) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, and stop switches 8L, 8C, The left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 7) for notifying that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective are provided inside the 8R. It has been.

  Inside the front door 1b, there is a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, while changing a set value and confirming a set value described later. The set value display 24 that displays the set value at that time, and the validity / invalidity of the stop function for controlling the stop state at the end of the BB, which will be described later (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) A check switch 36a for selecting the automatic settlement function that controls automatic settlement at the end of BB, which will be described later (processing to settle (return) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation). An automatic settlement switch 36b for selecting invalidity and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 are provided in a hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 5) provided inside the housing 1a. And a medal having a insertion medal sensor 31 for detecting a medal that has been inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flowed down to the hopper tank 34a side. A selector (not shown) and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 7) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 5, a reel sensor 33L that can detect the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, as shown in FIG. , 33C, 33R (see FIG. 7), an external output substrate 1000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, and a hopper tank 34a. A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals from the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  The front side of the power supply box 100 functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stop state in a normal state. There are provided a reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value of a winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery to be described later, and a power switch 39 that is operated when the power is turned on / off. .

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. To use the credit, the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay line L1 (see FIG. 4) becomes valid and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the state where the game can be started. Become. In the present embodiment, the winning line L1 becomes valid when three cards are determined as the specified number of bets regardless of the gaming state and the specified number of bets are set. In addition, when a medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, only the winning line 1 set across the symbols arranged in the horizontal direction in the middle stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the middle stage of the reel 2R, that is, the middle stage, is the winning line. It has been established. In the present embodiment, only one winning line is applied, but a plurality of winning lines may be applied.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a combination of symbols (hereinafter also referred to as roles) that are activated and predetermined on the winning line is each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. When the display result is stopped, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are awarded to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 4). In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanied by a transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on the winning line, the gaming state is shifted according to the combination of symbols. ing.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated and the symbols start to change, any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated. When this is done, the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is stopped, and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (milliseconds).

  The reels 2L, 2C and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 × 21 (the number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the maximum of 4 symbols is drawn in 190 ms. Will be able to. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead is used. Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8R is operated, the symbol displayed in the middle row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. The symbols arranged within 5 frames including can be displayed on the winning line.

  FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 7, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 are generated. It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101.

  On the game control board 40, the above-described MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, insertion medal sensor 31, door open The detection switch 25 and reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Detection signals from these connected switches are input.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 101. The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 controls the game, and random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 65535 in this embodiment). A random number circuit 42 for generating a signal, a pulse oscillator 43 for supplying a clock signal of a constant frequency to the random number circuit 42, and a detection signal input from a switch connected directly to the game control board 40 or via the power supply board 101. Switch detection circuit 44, motor drive circuit 45 that controls the drive of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of the flow path switching solenoid 30, various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40 LED drive circuit 47 for controlling the driving of the power supply for the slot machine 1 When the voltage is detected and a voltage drop is detected, a power failure detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41, an initialization command is not input when the power is turned on or from the main CPU 41a A reset circuit 49 for providing a reset signal to the main CPU 41a and various other devices and circuits are sometimes mounted.

  The main CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b, and performs processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the main CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  Further, the main control unit 41 is supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 41c is held while the backup power is being supplied.

  The main CPU 41a repeatedly loops the process according to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 is changed as a basic process, and step by step according to the change of the detection state of the various switches. Execute the process to move to. Further, the main CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can interrupt the basic process by the occurrence of the interrupt and execute the interrupt process. The voltage output from the power interruption detection circuit 48 The power interruption interrupt process (main) is executed in response to the input of the decrease signal, and the timer interrupt process (main) is executed at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment). In addition, the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to a time longer than the sum of the time required to complete the repeated process according to the control state in the basic process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main) Therefore, the process that is repeated according to the control state between the current and next timer interrupt processes (main) is completed at least once.

  The main CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  An effect switch 56 is connected to the effect control board 90, and a detection signal of the effect switch 56 is input.

  The effect control board 90 includes a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 4) disposed on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1, an effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54 (see FIGS. 4 and 7), and the reel described above. An effect device such as an LED 55 is connected, and these effect devices are driven based on control by a later-described sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 performs output control of effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LEDs 55. However, in addition to the sub-control unit 91, an output control unit that directly controls the output of the effect device is mounted on the effect control board 90 or another board, and the sub-control unit 91 is based on a command from the main control unit 41. The output control unit may determine the output pattern of the effect device, and the output control unit may control the output of the effect device based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 91. In such a configuration, the sub control unit 91 and the output control may be performed. The output control of the rendering device is performed by both of the units.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are exemplified as the effect device, but the effect device is not limited to these, for example, a mechanically driven display. A device or a mechanically driven item may be applied as the effect device.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and a microcomputer provided with an I / O port 91d. The sub control unit 91 controls the effect, and the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 that performs display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the LED, an LED driving circuit 93 that performs drive control of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, When the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, a reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a and a detection signal input from the effect switch 56 connected to the effect control board 90 are detected. The switch detection circuit 96 outputs time information including date information and time information. The RTC 97, the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, an interruption detection circuit 98 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the sub CPU 91a, other circuits, etc. The sub CPU 91a receives the command transmitted from the game control board 40 and performs various controls for performing the effects, and directly or directly controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90. Control indirectly.

  Similar to the main CPU 41a, the sub CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). One of the interrupt terminals of the sub control unit 91 is connected to a strobe (INT) signal line that is output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command, among the command transmission lines, and the sub CPU 91a receives the strobe signal. An interrupt is generated based on the input to acquire a command from the main control unit 41 and execute a command reception interrupt process to be stored in the buffer. Further, the sub CPU 91a executes an interrupt process (sub) to be described later by generating an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval. One of the interrupt terminals of the sub-control unit 91 is connected to the power interruption detection circuit 98, and the sub CPU 91a responds to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98. Execute processing (sub). Further, when an unused interrupt occurs in the sub CPU 91a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rate being lower as the value is decreased in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24 as a display value, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Transition to the setting change state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the display returns to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is determined as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned OFF, the determined display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In order to confirm the set value, after the game is over, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on with no bet amount set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value read out from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24, thereby shifting to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be progressed, and by turning the setting key switch 37 to the OFF state, the setting confirmation state is ended and the state in which the game can proceed is returned.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when the main CPU 41a detects a voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48, a power interruption interrupt process (main) is executed. In the power interruption interrupt processing (main), the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 41c, which will be described later, and data for destructive diagnosis (5AH in this embodiment) in which any bit is 1 in the RAM 41c, that is, a specific value other than 0 In addition to storing data, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, and the RAM 41c is stored. The RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of the values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in this embodiment) of the RAM 41c. Therefore, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The main CPU 41a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of activation, confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, the RAM parity is 0, and the destructive diagnosis The processing state of the main CPU 41a is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c on the condition that the value of the data for use is correct, but the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1) or is destroyed. If the value of the diagnostic data is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error state so that the progress of the game is disabled. Unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the setting change state described above. It will not be released until

  In the present embodiment, all data stored in the RAM 41c is retained by the backup power source even during a power failure, and the main CPU 41a determines that the data in the RAM 41c is normal when the power is turned on. Although the configuration is such that the control state before power interruption is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, only the data necessary for the restoration of the control state in the event of a power failure is backed up among the data stored in the RAM 41c. It may be configured to return to the control state before power interruption based on the backed up data.

  In addition, when returning to the control state before the power interruption when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to return all the control states to the control state before the power interruption, and the minimum control state that does not disadvantage the player For example, it is not necessary to restore the state of all input ports to the state before power interruption.

  In addition, when the sub CPU 91a detects the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 98, the sub CPU 91a also executes a power interruption interrupt process (sub). In the power interruption interrupt processing (sub), the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 91c described later, and destructive diagnosis data in which any bit is 1 is stored in the RAM 91c, and data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c. The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on 0 becomes 0 and stored in the RAM 91c.

  Then, the sub CPU 91a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c at the time of activation, and based on the data stored in the RAM 91c on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. The processing state of the sub CPU 91a is restored to the state before the power interruption. If the RAM parity is not 0 (1), it is determined that the RAM is abnormal and the RAM 91c is initialized. In this case, unlike the main sub CPU 91a, the execution of the performance is not disabled only by initializing the RAM 91c.

  In the present embodiment, all data stored in the RAM 91c is held by the backup power source even during a power failure, and the sub CPU 91a determines that the data in the RAM 91c is normal when the power is turned on. Although the configuration is such that the control state before power interruption is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 91c, only the data necessary for restoration of the control state is backed up in the event of a power failure out of the data stored in the RAM 91c. It may be configured to return to the control state before power interruption based on the backed up data.

  In addition, when returning to the control state before the power interruption when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to return all the control states to the control state before the power interruption, and the minimum control state that does not disadvantage the player It is not necessary to restore the state of the input port or the progress in the middle of the production when it is interrupted. For example, while backing up only data indicating the gaming state such as whether it is in the BB or the normal gaming state, other than the effect corresponding to the gaming state (the effect during the BB during the BB, the normal effect when in the normal gaming state) If a power outage occurs during the execution of a specific production (such as a small role announcement), it will be backed up when the power is turned on instead of resuming the specific production that was being performed at the next power-on. An effect corresponding to the gaming state being played may be executed from the beginning.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a stop phase work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work in which data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of the BB, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time clock counter, is stored. The general work is a work that stores data that can be initialized at the end of the BB, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, and the total number of medals paid out in the BB. The special work is a work that stores data to be initialized only before the start of setting, such as data for transmitting a command to the effect control board 90 and various software random numbers. The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored. After initializing 0 before setting is started (before shifting to the setting change mode), 1 is stored. The set value that is corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored. The stop phase work is a work in which data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stored, and data indicating the stop phase is stored when the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are stopped. The Rukoto. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is established by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. In this case, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a operates when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON, when a RAM error occurs, when starting only when the setting key switch 37 is ON, BB At the end, when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both OFF, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed, the six initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied In addition, five types of initialization are performed in different regions to be initialized according to each initialization condition.

  Initialization 0 is performed when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON at the time of start-up, and initialization is performed before the transition to the setting change mode or when a RAM abnormality error occurs. In initialization 0, all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the storage area of the RAM 41c other than the used stack area are initialized. Initialization 1 is an initialization performed only when the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of start-up and shifts to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, in the storage area of the RAM 41c, All areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) other than the in-use stack area and the stop phase work are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the BB. In initialization 2, the general work, the unused area, and the unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an OFF state at the time of activation, and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The stored work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, initialization 0 and initialization 1 are performed before transition to the setting change mode. However, they may be performed at the end of the setting change mode, that is, after the setting is confirmed. In this case, if the set value work is initialized, the determined set value is lost. Therefore, the set value work is not initialized.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a winning is awarded when the winning symbols are arranged on any winning line. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with transition to big bonus and regular bonus, small roles with payout of medals, and setting of bet number. There is a re-player who can start the next game without needing.

The big bonus may be indicated as BB and the regular bonus may be indicated as RB. In some cases, a big bonus or a regular bonus is simply referred to as a bonus. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to set a winning flag in the RAM 41c to win the internal lottery and allow winning of the winning combination.

  FIG. 8 to FIG. 11 are diagrams for explaining the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations of winning combinations, and technical matters related to winning combinations. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41.

  In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, the main control unit 41 has RT0 and RT0 controlled after the bonus end, RT2 and RT3, which will be described later, are aligned on a winning line, which will be described later. RT1 controlled by RT1 and RT1 controlled by the winning replay described later in RT4 and RT4 controlled by RT4, which will be described later, or RT3 described later described below. RT2 controlled by winning a special replay to be performed, RT2 controlled by winning a special replay (referred to as SP replay) in RT2, and controlled when BB1, BB3, RB2 described later in RT0 to RT4 are won RT5, BB2, BB4, RB1 described later RT6 is controlled when you win, and one of the bonuses, such as RB and BB, which is controlled by the winning of the special role, is controlled in any of the game state.

  RT1 to 3 are more advantageous to the player than RT0 and 4 to 6 in that the winning probability of the re-gamer is high and the payout rate of medals per game is higher than RT0 and 4 to 6. A state.

  In RT1 to RT3, the payout rate of medals per game is higher than RT0 and 4 to 6, but among them RT3 is the most anticipated acquisition of the number of navigation stocks described later. It can be said that this is an advantageous state for the player. Further, while there may be a direct transition from RT2 to RT3, there is no direct transition from RT1 to RT3, and in this respect RT2 can be said to be a more advantageous state for the player than RT1.

  RT0 and 4 have a low probability of winning a re-gamer, and the payout rate of medals per game is lower than RT1 to 3 and 5 and 6, compared to RT1 to 3 and 5 and 6. This is a disadvantage for the player.

  RT5 and RT6 have a lower probability of winning a re-gamer than RT1-3, and the payout rate of medals per game is lower than RT1-3, which is less disadvantageous for the player than RT1-3. However, it is more advantageous for the player than RT0 and 4 in that the winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than RT0 and 4 and the payout rate of medals per game is higher than RT0 and 4. A state.

  In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, the main control unit 41 can control the gaming state to be RT0 to 6 and bonus, while the gaming state is RT1 to 4, the sub-control unit 91 can control the gaming state. The effect state can be controlled during an assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT) that is a notification period in which a navigation effect for notifying the internal lottery result can be executed.

  Referring to FIG. 8, special bonuses among the winning combinations include big bonuses 1 to 4 (hereinafter, each big bonus is referred to as BB), regular bonuses 1 and 2 (hereinafter, each regular bonus is referred to as RB). ) 6 types of bonuses are included.

  BB1 is awarded when a combination of “black 7-black 7-black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines. BB2 is awarded when a combination of “network 7−network 7−network 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. BB3 is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-white 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. BB4 is awarded when the combination of “BAR-BAR-BAR” is aligned on any of the winning lines. BB4 is awarded when a combination of “black 7-white 7-net 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines.

  When winning one of BB1 to BB4, a regular bonus 1 (hereinafter referred to as RB1) is transferred to a bonus that is controlled every game. Further, when any of BB1 to BB4 is won, the game is shifted to a bonus that is controlled every game as a regular bonus during BB (hereinafter referred to as BBRB).

  While there is a bonus transferred due to winning of BB1 to BB4, a big bonus medium flag corresponding to the type of the winning BB is set in the RAM 41c. Further, while in BBRB, a regular bonus medium flag corresponding to BBRB is set in the RAM 41c. That is, while the big bonus medium flag is set to the ON state, the regular bonus medium flag corresponding to BBRB is set to the ON state.

  The bonus generated due to the winning of any one of BB1 to BB4 is terminated on condition that 316 or more medals have been paid out.

  RB1 wins when a combination of “net 7-net 7-black 7” is aligned on any of the pay lines. RB2 is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines.

  When winning one of RB1 and RB2, the bonus is controlled once as a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB). While there is a bonus transferred due to winning of RB1 and RB2, a regular bonus medium flag corresponding to the type of RB that has won is set in the RAM 41c.

  The bonus generated due to the winning of either RB1 or RB2 ends on the condition that any winning combination has won six times or 12 games have been consumed.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the game state is controlled by RT5 from the internal winning of any of BB1, BB3, or RB2 until the winning is won, and the winning is made after winning of any of BB2, BB4, or RB1 Until then, the gaming state is controlled by RT6. In the internal RTs 5 and 6, the probability of winning the replay is higher than that in the normal gaming state. Also, as shown in FIG. 12, after the bonus is over, the gaming state is controlled to RT0.

  Even if one of BB1 to BB4, RB1, or RB2 is won in an internal lottery to be described later, if the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated at an appropriate timing to enable winning of these roles, these I won't win a role. The symbols composing BB1 to BB4, RB1, and RB2 ("black 7", "white 7", and "net 7") are arranged within 5 frames on each of the left reel 2L, middle reel 2C, and right reel 2R. This is because it has not been done.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the small combination among the winning combinations will be described. Among the winning roles, there are middle bells, lower right bells, upper bells 1-8, middle watermelons, right lower watermelons, upper watermelons, lower cherries, middle cherries, one role, right-up bells, right-up bevels, Includes a rising rivet.

  The middle bell is awarded when the combination of “bell-bell-bell” is arranged on the winning line L1, and eight medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 6, the bells are arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when a middle bell is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that a winning can be made regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  The right-down bell is when any combination of “Replay-Bell-Replay”, “Replay-Bell-Plum”, “Plum-Bell-Replay”, and “Plum-Bell-Plum” is aligned on the winning line L1. Wins and 8 medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 6, the replay and plum of the left reel 2 </ b> L are disposed at a position below the bell, and the replay and plum of the right reel 2 </ b> R are disposed at a position one above the bell. Therefore, when any combination of “Replay-Bell-Replay”, “Replay-Bell-Plum”, “Plum-Bell-Replay”, and “Plum-Bell-Plum” is prepared, “Bell-Bell-Bell” "Will be aligned to the right.

  Further, either the plum or the replay is arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, and the bell is arranged within 5 frames in the middle reel 2C. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when a right-down bell is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that a winning can be made regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  Next, the upper bells 1 to 8 will be described. The upper bell 1 is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Orange-Orange” is aligned on the winning line L1. The upper bell 2 is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Orange-BAR” is aligned on the winning line L1. The upper bell 3 is awarded when the combination of “Replay-BAR-Orange” is aligned on the winning line L1. The upper bell 4 is awarded when the combination of “Replay-BAR-BAR” is aligned on the winning line L1. The upper bell 5 is awarded when a combination of “plum-orange-orange” is arranged on the winning line L1. The upper bell 6 is awarded when the “Plum-Orange-BAR” combination is aligned on the winning line L1. The upper bell 7 is awarded when the combination of “Plum-BAR-Orange” is aligned on the winning line L1. The upper bell 8 is awarded when the combination of “Plum-BAR-BAR” is aligned on the winning line L1.

  Here, referring to FIG. 6, the replay and plum of the left reel 2L, the BAR and orange of the middle reel, and the BAR and orange of the right reel 2R are arranged at positions one level below the bell. “Orange-Orange”, “Replay-Orange-BAR”, “Replay-BAR-Orange”, “Replay-BAR-BAR”, “Plum-Orange-Orange”, “Plum-Orange-BAR”, “Plum-BAR-” When any combination of “Orange” and “Plum-BAR-BAR” is arranged, the combination of “Bell-Bell-Bell” is arranged in the upper stage.

  In the left reel 2L, replays and plums are not arranged within 5 frames, and orange and BAR are not arranged within 5 frames for each of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R. Therefore, even if one of the upper bells 1 to 8 is won in the internal lottery to be described later, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the winning upper bell configuration symbols must be operated at an appropriate timing. For example, you won't win the winning top bell.

  The middle stage watermelon becomes a prize when a combination of “black 7-watermelon-watermelon”, “white 7-watermelon-watermelon”, “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is arranged on the winning line L1. When the middle watermelon wins, 5 medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 6, in the left reel 2L, any of black 7, white 7, and watermelon is arranged within 5 frames, but for each of the middle reel 2C and right reel 2R, It is not placed within 5 frames. For this reason, even if the middle stage watermelon is won in the internal lottery described later, the middle stage watermelon will not be won if the stop switches 8C and 8R corresponding to the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are not operated at an appropriate timing. .

  The right-down watermelon is awarded when a combination of “Bell-Watermelon-Black 7” and “Bell-Watermelon-White 7” is aligned on the winning line L1. When a watermelon with a downward right wins, 5 medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 6, the bell of the left reel 2 </ b> L is arranged at a position below one of black 7, white 7, and watermelon, and black 7 and white 7 of the right reel 2 </ b> R are watermelon Therefore, when any combination of “Bell-Watermelon-Black 7” and “Bell-Watermelon-White 7” is prepared, “Black 7-Watermelon-Watermelon”, “White The combination of “7-Watermelon-Watermelon” and “Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon” will be aligned downward.

  In the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, but the watermelon of the middle reel 2C and the black 7 and white 7 of the right reel 2R are not arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if the right-down watermelon is won in the internal lottery described later, if the stop switches 8C and 8R corresponding to the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are not operated at an appropriate timing, the right-down watermelon will be won. There is no.

  The upper watermelon is awarded when the combination of “Bell-Black 7-Replay” and “Bell-White 7-Replay” is aligned on the winning line L1. When the upper watermelon wins, 5 medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 6, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position below one of black 7, white 7 and watermelon, and black 7 and white 7 of the middle reel 2C are watermelon. Since the replay of the right reel 2R is located one position below the watermelon, “Bell-Black 7-Replay” and “Bell-White 7-Replay” are arranged. When one of the combinations is completed, the combinations of “Black 7-Watermelon-Watermelon”, “White 7-Watermelon-Watermelon”, and “Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon” are aligned in the upper stage.

  Further, in the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, but the black 7 and white 7 of the middle reel 2C and the replay of the right reel 2R are not arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if the upper watermelon is won in the internal lottery described later, the upper watermelon will not be won if the stop switches 8C and 8R corresponding to the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are not operated at an appropriate timing. .

  The lower cherries are awarded when the combination of “BAR-Orange-ANY (ANY can be any pattern)”, “BAR-BAR-ANY”, and “BAR-Bell-ANY” on the winning line L1. . When the lower cherries win, two medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 6, since the BAR of the left reel 2L is arranged one position above the cherry, "BAR-orange-ANY (ANY can be any symbol)", "BAR- When any combination of “BAR-ANY” and “BAR-Bell-ANY” is prepared, “Cherry” on the left reel will stop at the lower stage, and the combination of “Cherry-ANY-ANY” will move up and down to the right. Will be aligned.

  In the middle reel 2C, any one of orange, BAR, and bell is arranged within 5 frames, but in the left reel 2L, BAR is not arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if the lower cherries are won in an internal lottery to be described later, the lower cherries will not be won if the stop switch 8L corresponding to the left reel 2L is not operated at an appropriate timing.

  The middle cherries are awarded when the combination of “cherry-ANY-ANY” is arranged on the winning line L1. When the middle cherries win, a medal is paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 6, in the left reel 2L, cherries are not arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if the middle cherries are won in an internal lottery to be described later, the middle cherries will not be won if the stop switch 8L corresponding to the left reel 2L is not operated at an appropriate timing.

  A single winning combination is awarded when a combination of “black 7-cherry-net 7” is aligned on the winning line L1. When one winning combination wins, one medal is paid out.

  Referring to FIG. 6, the black 7 of the left reel 2L, the cherry of the middle reel, and the net 7 of the right reel are not arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if one winning combination is won in an internal lottery to be described later, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R are not operated at an appropriate timing. I won't win a prize.

  The bells that go up to the right are “Black 7-Bell-Orange”, “White 7-Bell-Orange”, “Watermelon Bell-Orange”, “Black 7-Bell-BAR”, “White 7-Bell-” on the winning line L1. When any combination of “BAR” and “Watermelon Bell-BAR” is completed, a prize is awarded and 10 medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 6, the black 7, white 7 and watermelon of the left reel 2L are arranged one position above the bell, and the orange and BAR of the right reel 2R are one position below the bell. "Black 7-Bell-Orange", "White 7-Bell-Orange", "Watermelon Bell-Orange", "Black 7-Bell-BAR", "White 7-Bell-BAR" When any combination of “watermelon-bell-BAR” is aligned, the combination of “bell-bell-bell” is aligned to the right.

  In the left reel 2L, one of black 7, white 7, and watermelon is arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel 2C, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, orange, BAR One of these is arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when a right-up bell is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that, as a rule, it can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  A bevel that rises to the right is awarded when any combination of “Black 7-Bell-Bell”, “White 7-Bell-Bell”, and “Watermelon Bell-Bell” is placed on the winning line L1. Medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 6, the black 7, white 7 and watermelon of the left reel 2L are arranged one position above the bell, and the bell of the right reel 2R is one below the replay or plum. When the combination of “Black 7-Bell-Bell”, “White 7-Bell-Bell” and “Watermelon Bell-Bell” is prepared, “Bell-Bell-Replay”, “ The combination of “bell-bell-plum” will be aligned to the right.

  In the left reel 2L, one of black 7, white 7, and watermelon is arranged within 5 frames, and in the middle reel 2C and right reel 2R, the bell is arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when a right-up bevel is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that, as a rule, it can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  The rising rivet is awarded when any combination of “Bell-Bell-Orange” and “Bell-Bell-BAR” is aligned on the winning line L1, and 10 medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 6, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position one above the replay or plum, and the orange and BAR of the right reel 2R are arranged at a position one below the bell. Therefore, when any combination of “Bell-Bell-Orange” and “Bell-Bell-BAR” is prepared, the combination of “Replay-Bell-Bell” and “Plum-Bell-Bell” should be aligned to the right. It becomes.

  In the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, one of orange and BAR is arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when an upward lottery is won in an internal lottery to be described later, a winning combination can be made regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  The normal replay is awarded when a combination of “Replay-Replay-Replay”, “Replay-Replay-Plum”, “Plum-Replay-Replay”, and “Plum-Replay-Plum” is arranged on the winning line L1. Replays and plums are arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L, middle reel 2C, and right reel 2R. Therefore, as a general rule, it can be said that the normal replay is a role that can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if the winning is made.

  The lower replay includes “Bell-Orange-Orange”, “Belle-Orange-Cherry”, “Belle-Orange-Watermelon”, “Belle-Orange-Black 7”, “Belle-Orange-Net 7”, "Bell-Orange-White 7", "Bell-BAR-Orange", "Bell-BAR-Cherry", "Bell-BAR-Watermelon", "Bell-BAR-Black 7", "Bell-BAR-Net 7" , “BELL-BAR-WHITE 7” combination is awarded.

  Here, referring to FIG. 6, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position one above the replay or plum, and the orange and BAR of the middle reel 2C are arranged at a position one above the replay. "Bell-orange-orange", "bell-orange-cherry", "bell-orange-watermelon", "bell-orange-black 7", "bell-orange-net 7", "bell-orange-" "White 7", "Bell-BAR-Orange", "Bell-BAR-Cherry", "Bell-BAR-Watermelon", "Bell-BAR-Black 7", "Bell-BAR-Net 7", "Bell-BAR" -When any combination of "White 7" is prepared, the combination of "Replay-Replay-ANY", "Replay-Plum-ANY", "Plum-Replay-ANY", and "Plum-Plum-ANY" is arranged in the lower row. And thus.

  Further, in the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel, orange and BAR are arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, orange, cherry, watermelon, black 7, net 7 , One of white 7 is arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when the lower stage replay is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that the prize can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  The tumble replay is awarded when the combination of “bell-replay-bell” is arranged on the winning line L1.

  Here, referring to FIG. 6, the bell of the left reel 2 </ b> L is disposed at a position one above the replay or plum, and the bell of the right reel 2 </ b> R is disposed at a position one position below the replay. So, when the combination of “bell-replay-bell” is complete, the combination of “replay-replay-replay”, “replay-replay-plum”, “plum-replay-replay”, “plum-replay-plum” goes up to the right. Will be aligned.

  In the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel, the replay is arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, the bell is arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when a fall replay is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that a prize can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 12, after winning the fall replay in RT1, it is controlled to RT4.

  The promotion replay 1 is awarded when a combination of “replay-replay-bell” and “plum-replay-bell” is arranged on the winning line L1. In the left reel 2L, one of the replays and plums is arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel 2C, the replay is arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, the bell is arranged within 5 frames. ing. Therefore, it can be said that, as a general rule, the promotion replay 1 can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if it is won.

  The promotion replay 2 is performed when any combination of “Bell-Orange-Replay”, “Bell-Orange-Plum”, “Bell-BAR-Replay”, and “Bell-BAR-Plum” is arranged on the winning line L1. Winning a prize.

  Here, referring to FIG. 6, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position one above the replay or plum, and the orange and BAR of the middle reel 2C are arranged at a position one above the replay. Since the replay and plum of the right reel 2R are arranged one position above the bell, “bell-orange-replay”, “bell-orange-plum”, “bell-BAR-replay”, “ When the combination of “bell-BAR-plum” is arranged, the combination of “replay-replay-bell” and “plum-replay-bell” are arranged in the lower stage.

  In the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel, orange and BAR are arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, replay and plum are arranged within 5 frames. ing. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when the promotion replay 2 is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that, as a rule, it can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 12, after winning a promotion replay (promotion replay 1 or promotion replay 2) in RT4, it is controlled to RT1. As will be described later, the promotion replay is set so that it is not won in the internal lottery at RT0, RT2, and RT3. Further, when the special combination and the promotion replay are won at the same time in the internal lottery at RT0, 2, 3, the process shifts to RT5 or RT6 at that time. For this reason, RT0, RT2, and RT3 do not win a promotion replay. As a result, it is configured not to be controlled from RT0, RT2, RT3 to RT1, and is configured to receive a promotion replay prize only when it is RT4 and to be controlled by RT1 only from that RT4.

  The special replay is awarded when a combination of “bell-replay-replay” and “bell-replay-plum” is arranged on the winning line L1. In the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel 2C, the replay is arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, one of the replays and plums is arranged within 5 frames. ing. Therefore, as a general rule, special replays can be said to be a role that can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if they are elected.

  As shown in FIG. 12, after winning a special replay at RT1 and RT3, the control is performed at RT2. As will be described later, the special replay is set not to win by itself in the internal lottery at RT0 and RT4. Further, when the special combination and special replay are won at the same time in the internal lottery at RT0, 4, the process shifts to RT5 or RT6 at that time. For this reason, no special replay is won at RT0 and RT4. As a result, it is configured not to be controlled from RT0, RT4 to RT2, and special replay is awarded only when RT1, RT3, and is configured to be controlled by RT2 only from the RT1, RT3. If a special replay is won at RT2, RT2 is maintained.

  The SP replay includes “Replay-Orange-Black 7”, “Replay-Orange-Net 7”, “Replay-Orange-White 7”, “Replay-Orange-Plum”, “Replay-BAR-Black 7” on the winning line L1. ”,“ Replay-BAR-Net 7 ”,“ Replay-BAR-White 7 ”,“ Replay-BAR-Plum ”,“ Plum-Orange-Black 7 ”,“ Plum-Orange-Net 7 ”,“ Plum-Orange ” -White 7 "," Plum-Orange-Plum "," Plum-BAR-Black 7 "," Plum-BAR-Net 7 "," Plum-BAR-White 7 "," Plum-BAR-Plum " The winning combination will be awarded when the combination is complete.

  Here, referring to FIG. 6, the replay and plum of the left reel 2L are arranged at a position one above the orange and BAR, and the black 7, net 7, white 7 and plum of the right reel 2R are orange. , Because it is located one position below the BAR, "Orange-Orange-Orange", "Orange-Orange-BAR", "Orange-BAR-BAR", "BAR-Orange-Orange", "BAR-Orange" -BAR "," BAR-BAR-BAR "combination will be aligned to the right.

  In the left reel 2L, replay and plum are arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel orange and BAR are arranged in 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, black 7, net 7, white 7, The plum is arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when SP replay is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that the winning can be made regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 12, after winning the SP replay at RT2, RT3 is controlled. As will be described later, the SP replay is set so that it is not won independently in the internal lottery at RT0, RT1, and RT4. Further, when the special combination and SP replay are won at the same time in the internal lottery at RT0, 1, 4, the process shifts to RT5 or RT6 at that time. For this reason, SP replay is not won at RT0, RT1, and RT4. As a result, it is configured not to be controlled from RT0, RT1, RT4 to RT3, and is configured to win SP replay only when it is RT2 and to be controlled by RT3 only from the RT2. When a special replay is won at RT3, RT3 is maintained.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the transition outcome will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, the transition items are “replay-orange-bell”, “replay-BAR-bell”, “plum-orange-bell”, “plum-BAR-bell”, “replay-bell-orange”. ”,“ Replay-Bell-BAR ”,“ Plum-Bell-Orange ”,“ Plum-Bell-BAR ”,“ Black 7-Orange-Orange ”,“ Black 7-Orange-BAR ”,“ Black 7-BAR- ” "Orange", "Black 7-BAR-BAR", "White 7-Orange-Orange", "White 7-Orange-BAR", "White 7-BAR-Orange", "White 7-BAR-BAR", "Watermelon -Orange-orange "," Watermelon-orange-BAR "," Watermelon-BAR-orange "," Watermelon-BAR-BAR ". In the present embodiment, left bells 1 to 4, middle bells 1 to 4, and right bells 1 to 4, which will be described later, are elected, and the upper bells that are elected as the first stop other than the reels that are the winning conditions for the middle bell When the game is missed, the above-mentioned transition outcome is aligned with the winning line L1.

  As shown in FIG. 12, after the transition outcomes are aligned on the winning line L1 in RT0 and RT1 to RT3, control is performed to RT4. Note that RT4 is maintained when the transition outcomes are aligned with the winning line L1 at RT4.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13 to FIG. 17, combinations of lottery object combinations that are read as lottery object combinations for each gaming state will be described. In the present embodiment, the combination of the lottery target combinations varies depending on which game state is selected. As will be described later as a lottery target combination, a plurality of winning combinations can be read out simultaneously and can be won in duplicate. In FIG. 13 to FIG. 17, “+” is written between winning winning combinations to indicate that the winning combination is read out simultaneously in the internal lottery.

  In FIGS. 13 to 17, the lottery target combination is shown in the vertical column, and the gaming state is shown in the horizontal column. In the column where the gaming state intersects with the lottery target, a circle indicates that the lottery target is read out in the gaming state, and a cross indicates the lottery target when in the gaming state. This indicates that the combination is not read out.

  Moreover, the numerical value shown under (circle) mark of FIGS. 13-16 shows the number of judgment values of a predetermined setting value (for example, setting value 1). An internal lottery is performed using the number of determination values. The denominator of the number of determination values is set to “65536” corresponding to a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535). Therefore, for example, the winning probability of the lottery target combination (ordinary “watermelon” in FIG. 7) for which “300” is set as the number of determination values is 300/65536.

  FIGS. 13 and 14 show combinations of special combinations that are read out as lottery targets for each gaming state, FIG. 15 shows combinations of small combinations that are read out as lottery targets for each gaming state, and FIG. The combination of the re-games read out as the lottery target game for each game state is shown. FIG. 17 shows combinations of the combinations constituting the simultaneous winning combinations shown in FIGS.

  When the gaming state is RT0, BB1, BB1 + weak watermelon, BB1 + strong watermelon, BB1 + weak cherry, BB1 + strong cherry, BB1 + middle cherries, BB1 + 1 double role, BB1 + normal replay, BB1 + fall replay, BB1 + promoted replay, BB1 + special replay, BB1 + SP replay, BB2, BB2 + weak watermelon, BB2 + strong watermelon, BB2 + weak cherry, BB2 + strong cherry, BB2 + middle cherries, BB2 + 1 player, BB2 + normal replay, BB2 + tumble replay, BB2 + promoted replay, BB2 + special replay, BB2 + special replay, BB3 + , BB3 + strong watermelon, BB3 + weak cherry, BB3 + strong cherry, BB3 + middle cherries, BB3 + 1 sheet, BB3 + normal replay, BB3 + fall replay, BB3 + promoted replay, BB + Special Replay, BB4, BB4 + Middle Cherry, BB4 + 1 Sheet, BB4 + Special Replay, RB1, RB1 + Strong Watermelon, RB1 + Weak Cherry, RB1 + Strong Cherry, RB1 + 1 Sheet, RB2, RB2 + Weak Watermelon, RB2 + Strong Watermelon, RB2 + Weak Cherry, RB2 + strong cherry, RB2 + 1 piece, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, Right bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherries, one-piece combination, and normal replay are targeted for internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as target roles for internal lottery.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 17, a weak watermelon is an upper stage watermelon + right lowering watermelon. A strong watermelon is a middle-stage watermelon + right-down watermelon. That is, when the middle stage watermelon wins, it can be recognized that it is a strong watermelon. Weak cherries are lower cherries alone, strong cherries are lower cherries + 1 piece, whereas weak cherries are controlled so that the combination of “BAR-BAR-BAR” can be derived in the middle. The strong cherry is controlled so that the combination of “BAR-BAR-BAR” can be derived in the middle stage, the cherry stops in the lower stage of the left reel 2L, and “BAR-BAR-BAR” in the middle stage. You can recognize that it is a strong cherry by having the combination of.

  The bell is a middle bell + a downward-sloping bell. Left bell 1 is right falling bell 5 + upper bell 5 + upper bell 8, left bell 2 is right falling bell + upper bell 6 + upper bell 7, and left bell 3 is right falling bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 3, left bell 4 is right falling bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 4. The left bells 1 to 4 are also simply called left bells. The middle bell 1 is the middle bell + the upper bell 2 + the upper bell 5, the middle bell 2 is the middle bell + the upper bell 1 + the upper bell 6, and the middle bell 3 is the middle bell + the upper bell 4 + the upper bell. 7 and the middle bell 4 is the middle bell + the upper bell 3 + the upper bell 8. The middle bells 1 to 4 are also simply called middle bells. The right bell 1 is the middle bell + the upper bell 3 + the upper bell 5, the right bell 2 is the middle bell + the upper bell 1 + the upper bell 7, and the right bell 3 is the middle bell + the upper bell 4 + the upper bell. 6 and the right bell 4 is the middle bell + the upper bell 2 + the upper bell 8. The right bells 1 to 4 are also simply called right bells. The left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, and the right bells 1 to 4 are also simply referred to as push order bells.

  The promotion replay is promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2.

  When the gaming state is RT1, BB1, BB1 + weak watermelon, BB1 + strong watermelon, BB1 + weak cherry, BB1 + strong cherry, BB1 + middle cherries, BB1 + 1 double-player, BB1 + normal replay, BB1 + fall replay, BB1 + promoted replay, BB1 + special replay, BB1 + SP replay, BB2, BB2 + weak watermelon, BB2 + strong watermelon, BB2 + weak cherry, BB2 + strong cherry, BB2 + middle cherries, BB2 + 1 player, BB2 + normal replay, BB2 + tumble replay, BB2 + promoted replay, BB2 + special replay, BB2 + special replay, BB3 + , BB3 + strong watermelon, BB3 + weak cherry, BB3 + strong cherry, BB3 + middle cherries, BB3 + 1 sheet, BB3 + normal replay, BB3 + fall replay, BB3 + promoted replay, BB + Special Replay, BB4, BB4 + Middle Cherry, BB4 + 1 Sheet, BB4 + Special Replay, RB1, RB1 + Strong Watermelon, RB1 + Weak Cherry, RB1 + Strong Cherry, RB1 + 1 Sheet, RB2, RB2 + Weak Watermelon, RB2 + Strong Watermelon, RB2 + Weak Cherry, RB2 + strong cherry, RB2 + 1 piece, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, Right bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle tier cherry, 1 part, replay GR11, replay GR12, replay GR13, replay GR14, replay GR15, replay GR16, replay GR21, replay GR22 , Replay GR23, replay GR24, replay GR25 are internal lottery Will be subject, it is read out in the order as the target role of internal lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the replay GR11 is a fall replay + promotion replay 2, the replay GR12 is a fall replay + promotion replay 2 + normal replay, and the replay GR13 is a fall replay + promotion replay 1. Replay GR14 is fall replay + promotion replay 1 + normal replay, replay GR15 is fall replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2, and replay GR16 is fall replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2+. Usually a replay.

  Replay GR21 is tumble replay + special replay, replay GR22 is tumble replay + special replay + normal replay, replay GR23 is tumble replay + special replay + lower replay, and replay GR24 is Tumble replay + special replay + normal replay + lower replay. Replay GR25 is tumble replay + special replay + promotion replay 1.

  When the gaming state is RT2, BB1, BB1 + weak watermelon, BB1 + strong watermelon, BB1 + weak cherry, BB1 + strong cherry, BB1 + middle cherries, BB1 + 1 double-player, BB1 + normal replay, BB1 + fall replay, BB1 + promoted replay, BB1 + special replay, BB1 + SP replay, BB2, BB2 + weak watermelon, BB2 + strong watermelon, BB2 + weak cherry, BB2 + strong cherry, BB2 + middle cherries, BB2 + 1 player, BB2 + normal replay, BB2 + tumble replay, BB2 + promoted replay, BB2 + special replay, BB2 + special replay, BB3 + , BB3 + strong watermelon, BB3 + weak cherry, BB3 + strong cherry, BB3 + middle cherries, BB3 + 1 sheet, BB3 + normal replay, BB3 + fall replay, BB3 + promoted replay, BB + Special Replay, BB4, BB4 + Middle Cherry, BB4 + 1 Sheet, BB4 + Special Replay, RB1, RB1 + Strong Watermelon, RB1 + Weak Cherry, RB1 + Strong Cherry, RB1 + 1 Sheet, RB2, RB2 + Weak Watermelon, RB2 + Strong Watermelon, RB2 + Weak Cherry, RB2 + strong cherry, RB2 + 1 piece, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, Right bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle tier cherry, 1 part, normal replay, replay GR31, replay GR32, replay GR33, replay GR34, replay GR35, replay GR36 internal lottery And are sequentially read out as the target combination of the internal lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 17, replay GR31 is special replay + SP replay + normal replay, replay GR32 is special replay + SP replay + normal replay + falling replay, and replay GR33 is special replay + SP. Replay + lower replay, replay GR34 is special replay + SP replay + lower replay + fall replay, replay GR35 is special replay + SP replay + normal replay + lower replay, and special replay with replay GR36 + SP replay + normal replay + lower replay + falling replay.

  When the gaming state is RT3, BB1, BB1 + weak watermelon, BB1 + strong watermelon, BB1 + weak cherry, BB1 + strong cherry, BB1 + middle cherries, BB1 + 1 double role, BB1 + normal replay, BB1 + fall replay, BB1 + promoted replay, BB1 + special replay, BB1 + SP replay, BB2, BB2 + weak watermelon, BB2 + strong watermelon, BB2 + weak cherry, BB2 + strong cherry, BB2 + middle cherries, BB2 + 1 player, BB2 + normal replay, BB2 + tumble replay, BB2 + promoted replay, BB2 + special replay, BB2 + special replay, BB3 + , BB3 + strong watermelon, BB3 + weak cherry, BB3 + strong cherry, BB3 + middle cherries, BB3 + 1 sheet, BB3 + normal replay, BB3 + fall replay, BB3 + promoted replay, BB + Special Replay, BB4, BB4 + Middle Cherry, BB4 + 1 Sheet, BB4 + Special Replay, RB1, RB1 + Strong Watermelon, RB1 + Weak Cherry, RB1 + Strong Cherry, RB1 + 1 Sheet, RB2, RB2 + Weak Watermelon, RB2 + Strong Watermelon, RB2 + Weak Cherry, RB2 + strong cherry, RB2 + 1 piece, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, Right bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle tier cherry, 1 part, replay GR31, replay GR32, replay GR33, replay GR34, replay GR35, replay GR36, SP replay are internal lottery And are sequentially read out as the target combination of the internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is RT4, BB1, BB1 + weak watermelon, BB1 + strong watermelon, BB1 + weak cherry, BB1 + strong cherry, BB1 + middle cherries, BB1 + 1 double role, BB1 + normal replay, BB1 + fall replay, BB1 + promoted replay, BB1 + special replay, BB1 + SP replay, BB2, BB2 + weak watermelon, BB2 + strong watermelon, BB2 + weak cherry, BB2 + strong cherry, BB2 + middle cherries, BB2 + 1 player, BB2 + normal replay, BB2 + tumble replay, BB2 + promoted replay, BB2 + special replay, BB2 + special replay, BB3 + , BB3 + strong watermelon, BB3 + weak cherry, BB3 + strong cherry, BB3 + middle cherries, BB3 + 1 sheet, BB3 + normal replay, BB3 + fall replay, BB3 + promoted replay, BB + Special Replay, BB4, BB4 + Middle Cherry, BB4 + 1 Sheet, BB4 + Special Replay, RB1, RB1 + Strong Watermelon, RB1 + Weak Cherry, RB1 + Strong Cherry, RB1 + 1 Sheet, RB2, RB2 + Weak Watermelon, RB2 + Strong Watermelon, RB2 + Weak Cherry, RB2 + strong cherry, RB2 + 1 piece, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, Right bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle tier cherry, 1 part, normal replay, replay GR1, replay GR2, replay GR3, replay GR4, replay GR5, replay GR6 internal lottery And are sequentially read out as the target combination of the internal lottery.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 17, replay GR1 is normal replay + promotion replay 1, replay GR2 is normal replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2, and replay GR3 is normal replay + promotion replay. 1 + lower replay, replay GR4 is normal replay + promoted replay 1 + promoted replay 2 + lower replay, replay GR5 is normal replay + promoted replay 2, and replay GR6 is normal replay + promoted replay 2+ Lower replay.

  When the gaming state is RT5, 6, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry, single role, normal replay, lower replay, SP replay, fall replay, promotion replay, special replay are internal lottery It becomes a target and is sequentially read out as a target combination of internal lottery.

  In addition, in RT0-4 etc., weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherries that can be won at the same time as any of BB1-BB4, RB1, RB2, one piece role, normal replay, tumble replay, promotion replay, The number of SP replay judgment values is read separately from the bonus at RT5 and 6, respectively. Strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherries, one-piece combination, normal replay, fall replay, promotion replay, SP replay Therefore, the winning probabilities of each of the strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherries, single-player, normal replay, fall replay, promotion replay, and SP replay are guaranteed to be constant.

  When the gaming state is BBRB, weak cherries and all combinations are targeted for internal lottery and are sequentially read out as targets for internal lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 17, all roles are all small roles other than right-up bevel, that is, middle bell + right-down bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 2 + upper bell 3 + upper bell 4 + upper bell 5 + upper bell 6 + upper bell. 7 + upper bell 8 + middle watermelon + lower right watermelon + upper watermelon + lower cherry + middle cherry + one piece + right up bell + right up rivet.

  When the gaming state is RB, all combinations, RB bell 1, RB bell 2, and RB bell 3 are targeted for internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as targets for internal lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 17, RB bell 1 is a right-up bell + right-up bevel, RB bell 2 is a right-up bell + right-up rebebe + right-up beryl, and RB bell 3 is all Small bell, middle bell + lower right bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 2 + upper bell 4 + upper bell 4 + upper bell 6 + upper bell 7 + upper bell 8 + middle watermelon + lower watermelon + upper watermelon + lower cherry + middle Cherry + 1 piece + right rising bell + right rising bevel + right rising rebebe.

  Next, the internal lottery will be described in detail. In the internal lottery, all reels determine whether or not each winning combination described above is allowed, that is, whether or not the symbol combination that generates the winning combination is allowed to perform control to align with any winning line. Before the stop (actually, when the start switch 7 is operated), it is determined. In the internal lottery, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired from the random number generation circuit 42. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state, the obtained random number for internal lottery, the gaming state, and the determination value of each winning combination determined according to the set value set by the reset / setting switch 38 Depending on the number.

  In this embodiment, from the number of judgment values for each combination and combination of combinations, a range of determination values for each of the general combination and special combination such as a small combination and a replay combination, and one of the general combination and the special combination And the range of judgment values to be won in duplicate, and the internal lottery is not exclusive, and the general and special roles are won simultaneously in one game. There can be. However, for special roles of different types, the range of determination values to be won in duplicate is not specified, and special types of different types are drawn exclusively.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined for the combination or combination of roles that are the subject of the internal lottery and the current gaming state are sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery, and when the result of the addition overflows, Or it is determined that the combination of the winning combination is won.

  The number of determination values acquired in the special lottery internal lottery increases as the set value increases. As a result, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning the special combination in the internal lottery.

  When winning of any combination or combination of combinations is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the combination of combinations or combinations determined to be winning is set in the internal winning flag storage work assigned to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the winning flag for the special role is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set.

  Specifically, when a special combination is won, a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won is set in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is cleared. If a special role + general role is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role has been won is set in the special role storage work, and a general role win indicating that the general role has been won. Set the flag in the general role storage work. When a general combination is won, a winning flag for the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination is selected, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described. The main CPU 41a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the rotation of the reel starts and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to and the referred stop control table is drawn. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as internal winning state) Differences up to the address where the data is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Even when the winning combinations are different, when the same control is applied, the same address is stored as the index data. In such a case, the same table creation data is referred to. Thus, a stop control table is created.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of frames to be drawn according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of each, and it is necessary according to each status from this specified address. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the reel stop status and the stopped position of the stopped reel are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of frames to be pulled in at each timing when the stop operation is performed. In the present embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) are defined for one reel, and these areas are 1 to 21 (see FIG. 1) from the reel reference position. 6) is assigned.

  On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 1 to 21 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 1 to 21 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 1 to 21 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of drawn frames by area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of drawn frames by area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, in the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data, the region corresponding to each region number corresponds to the region number, and the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3 (The lower symbol area)) When the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected at the timing (the timing at which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each area number) It is a table with each number set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Next, when the main CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel will be described. .

  If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. And the number of drawn frames corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired frames.

  Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of drawn frames until it is stopped is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of frames to be drawn in from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3 It will stop in the lower symbol area).

  In the table index of this embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and furthermore, one table creation data contains one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel).

  In other words, table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and stop control tables corresponding to reel stop states (and stopped positions of stopped reels) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  In this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of drawn frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of four symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In the present embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, the winning combination is drawn in as much as possible in the range of 4 frames on the winning line, and the winning combination is drawn so that the winning combination is not aligned on the winning line. A stop control table with a defined number of frames is created and reel stop control is performed. If no winning combination is selected, a stop control table with a number of drawing frames that do not have any combination is defined. And stop control of the reel. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. The combination that has not been performed will be controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  If a special role is won in a state where the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, or if the special role is won at the same time as the simultaneous winning role, etc., the selected small role will be maximized in the range of 4 frames on the winning line The number of draws to be drawn is fixed, and for the stop operation position where the selected small role cannot be drawn into the winning line within the range of up to 4 frames, the selected special role is maximized within the range of 4 frames to the winning line A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so as to be pulled in as much as possible is generated, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if it is possible to stop all the small roles that have been selected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line and stop them, control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If you can't draw a small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, if you can stop with a special role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, A control is performed to stop them in a uniform manner, and a winning combination that has not been won will be controlled to be stopped within a 4-frame pull-in range.

  That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the small combination on the winning line over the special combination, and the special combination can be won only when the small combination cannot be drawn. As a result, after winning a small role and then winning a special role, the special role is won, and compared to the case where the special role is preferentially won, Since the special combination can be won, the player's medal can be increased as much as possible before the special combination is won, and reel control advantageous to the player is performed. When a special combination and a small combination can be drawn at the same time, only the small combination is drawn and the special combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the small combination.

  Next, if a special player and a re-playing player are elected at the same time, such as when a re-playing member is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, the winning re-playing player is placed on the winning line. A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so as to be pulled in as much as possible in the range of four frames is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of up to four frames.

  In the case where a plurality of types of re-game players are won simultaneously, as shown in FIG. 18, a maximum of 4 re-game players determined according to the types of re-game players won at the same time and the order of stop operations are displayed on the winning line. Control is performed so as to stop evenly within the frame drawing range. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining reel control when a plurality of replays are won simultaneously.

  When the replay GR1 (normal replay + promotion replay 1) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of middle left and right, the combination of the promotion replay 1 among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped. When the control is performed and the stop operation is performed in an order other than the left middle right, the control is performed so that the combination of the normal replays is aligned with the pay line L1 and stopped.

  When replay GR2 (normal replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, the combination of promoted replay 1 of the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line L1. If the stop operation is performed in an order other than left and right, the control is performed so that the combination of the normal replays is aligned with the pay line L1 and stopped.

  If Replay GR3 (Normal Replay + Promotion Replay 1 + Lower Replay) is won and stop operation is performed in the middle left and right order, the combination of Promotion Replay 1 among the selected replayers will be aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped When the stop operation is performed in an order other than middle left and right, the control is performed so that the combination of the normal replays is aligned with the pay line L1 and stopped.

  When replay GR4 (normal replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2 + bottom replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the middle right / left order, the combination of promotion replay 1 among the selected re-playing players is placed in the winning line L1. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than middle right and left, the control is performed so that the combination of the normal replays is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped.

  When replay GR5 (normal replay + promotion replay 2) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of the middle left and right, the combination of the promotion replay 2 among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped. If the stop operation is performed in an order other than the middle right and left, control is performed so that the combination of the normal replays is aligned with the pay line L1 and stopped.

  When Replay GR6 (Normal Replay + Promotion Replay 2 + Lower Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of middle right and left, the combination of Promotion Replay 2 of the selected replaying players is aligned with the winning line L1. Control to stop is performed, and when stop operations are performed in an order other than right center left, control is performed to align the combination of normal replays with the winning line L1 and stop.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the symbols constituting the promotion replay 1, the promotion replay 2, and the normal replay are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. The reel control is performed so that the promotion replay 1, the promotion replay 2 or the normal replay always wins regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R according to the operation order.

  In this way, different operation modes are set as the operation modes for allowing the replays GR1 to 6 to win the promoted replays 1 and 2.

  For this reason, in RT4 where replays GR1 to 6 are subject to internal lottery, if any of replays GR1 to GR6 is elected, the promoted replay will win with a probability of 1/6, and the transition to RT1 Become.

  When replay GR11 (falling replay + promotion replay 2) is won and a stop operation is performed in the order of middle left and right, the combination of promotion replay 2 among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped. When the control is performed and the stop operation is performed in an order other than the left middle right, the stop replay combination is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped.

  If Replay GR12 (Tumble Replay + Promotion Replay 2 + Normal Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, the combination of Promotion Replay 2 among the selected replay players will be aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than left and right, the control for stopping the combination of falling replays on the winning line L1 is performed.

  When the replay GR13 (falling replay + promotion replay 1) is won and a stop operation is performed in the order of middle left and right, the combination of the promotion replay 1 among the selected replay players is stopped in alignment with the winning line L1. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than middle left and right, control is performed so that the combination of fall replays is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped.

  If Replay GR14 (Tumble Replay + Promotion Replay 1 + Normal Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the middle right-left order, the combination of Promotion Replay 1 among the selected replayers is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than middle right and left, the control is performed to stop the combination of the fall replays aligned with the winning line L1.

  If Replay GR15 (Tumble Replay + Promotion Replay 1 + Promotion Replay 2) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of the middle left and right, the combination of Promotion Replay 2 of the selected re-players is aligned with the winning line L1. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than the middle left and right, the combination of falling replays is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped.

  When Replay GR16 (Tumble Replay + Promotion Replay 1 + Promotion Replay 2 + Normal Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of middle right and left, the combination of the promotion Replay 2 among the selected replay players is the winning line L1. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than the right middle left, the control is performed so that the combination of falling replays is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the symbols constituting the promotion replay 1, the promotion replay 2, and the fall replay are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. The reel control is performed so that the promotion replay 1, the promotion replay 2 or the fall replay always wins regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R according to the operation order.

  As described above, different operation modes are set as the operation modes in order to allow the replays GR11 to 16 to win the promoted replays 1 and 2 and to avoid the fall replay.

  For this reason, in RT1 where replays GR11-16 are subject to internal lottery, if any of replays GR11-16 is elected, the promotion replay wins with a probability of 1/6 and RT1 is maintained, The fall replay wins with a probability of 5/6 and moves to RT4.

  When the replay GR21 (falling replay + special replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left middle, right, and right, the combination of the special replays among the selected replay players is controlled to stop at the winning line L1. If the stop operation is performed in an order other than left middle right, control is performed so that the combination of falling replays is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped.

  When replay GR22 (falling replay + special replay + normal replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, the combination of special replays among the selected replaying players is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped. When the control is performed and the stop operation is performed in an order other than left and right, the control is performed so that the combination of the falling replays is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped.

  When replay GR23 (falling replay + special replay + lower replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the middle / left / right order, the combination of special replays among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped. When the control is performed and the stop operation is performed in an order other than middle left and right, the control is performed so that the combination of falling replays is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped.

  When Replay GR24 (Tumble Replay + Special Replay + Normal Replay + Lower Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of middle right and left, the special replay combinations among the selected replay players are aligned to the winning line L1. If the stop operation is performed in an order other than the middle right and left, the combination of the fall replay is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped.

  If Replay GR25 (Tumble Replay + Special Replay + Promotion Replay 1) is elected and right-pressed, that is, if a stop operation is performed in an operation mode in which the right reel 2R is first stopped, the special replay among the replayed players selected When the stop operation is performed in the operation mode in which the combination of the two is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped, and the left reel 2L is first stopped or in the middle mode, that is, the middle reel 2C is first stopped. In this case, a control for stopping the combination of the fall replays on the winning line L1 is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 6, since the symbols constituting the special replay and the fall replay are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less in all of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R, Regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R, the reel control is performed so that the special replay or the fall replay is always won.

  In this way, different operation modes are set as the operation modes in order to win special replays and avoid falling replays with the replays GR21 to GR25.

  For this reason, if one of the replays GR21 to 25 is elected in RT1 where the replays GR21 to 25 are the targets of the internal lottery, the special replay wins with a probability of 1/5 and the process proceeds to RT2. Then, the fall replay wins with a probability of 4/5 and shifts to RT4.

  When the replay GR31 (special replay + SP replay + normal replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left middle right, the combination of the SP replays among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped. If the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, control is performed so that the combination of the normal replays among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line L1, and the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle or right. If it has been made, control is performed to stop the special replay combination in alignment with the pay line L1.

  When replay GR32 (special replay + SP replay + normal replay + fall replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, the combination of SP replays among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line L1. When the stop operation is performed in the order of left, middle and right, control is performed to stop the combination of the normal replays in the winning replay combination with the winning line L1, and then press the middle or right When a stop operation is performed, control is performed to stop the combination of special replays aligned with the pay line L1.

  When replay GR33 (special replay + SP replay + lower stage replay) is won and stop operation is performed in the middle left and right order, control to stop the combination of SP replays among the selected replaying players on the winning line L1 If the stop operation is performed in the order of middle right and left, control is performed so that the combination of the normal replays among the selected re-playing players is aligned with the winning line L1, and the stop operation is performed by pressing left or right. If it has been made, control is performed to stop the special replay combination in alignment with the pay line L1.

  If Replay GR34 (Special Replay + SP Replay + Lower Replay + Falling Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the middle right / left order, the combination of SP replays among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line L1. If stop operation is performed in the order of middle left and right, the combination of normal replays among the selected re-playing players is controlled to stop at the winning line L1, and left or right press When a stop operation is performed, control is performed to stop the combination of special replays aligned with the pay line L1.

  When Replay GR35 (Special Replay + SP Replay + Normal Replay + Lower Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, the SP replay combinations of the selected replay players are aligned to the winning line L1. When the stop operation is performed in the order of right middle, left, and right, the combination of the normal replays among the selected re-playing players is controlled to stop at the winning line L1, and left or middle press When a stop operation is performed, control is performed to stop the combination of special replays aligned with the pay line L1.

  If Replay GR36 (Special Replay + SP Replay + Normal Replay + Lower Replay + Falling Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of middle right and left, the combination of SP Replay among the selected replayers will be the winning line When the stop operation is performed in the order of right and left, the control is performed so that the combination of the normal replays among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped. Alternatively, when a stop operation is performed by middle pressing, control is performed to stop the special replay combination in alignment with the pay line L1.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the symbols constituting the SP replay, special replay, and normal replay are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less in all of the left reel 2L, middle reel 2C, and right reel 2R. Accordingly, the reel control is performed so that the SP replay, special replay, or normal replay always wins regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  In this way, different operation modes are set as operation modes for winning SP replays with the replay GRs 31 to 36, and different operations are performed as operation modes for winning SP replays or normal replays and avoiding special replays. A mode is set.

  For this reason, if the replay GR 31 to 36 is the target of the internal lottery, if one of the replay GRs 31 to 36 is won, the SP replay can be won with a probability of 1/6 and transferred to RT3. Thus, the normal replay or special replay is won with a probability of 5/6 and RT2 is maintained. In addition, when SP replay is won as will be described later, one or more navigation stocks that are advantageous to the player are always given. Therefore, if one of the replays GR31 to 36 is won in RT2, 1 / It is possible to shift to RT3 where the SP replay wins with a probability of 6 and one or more navigation stocks are given and it is easy to win the SP replay, that is, the navigation stocks are likely to be given.

  Also, in RT3 where replays GR31 to 36 are subject to internal lottery, if any of replays GR31 to 36 is elected, SP replay wins with a probability of 1/6 and one or more navigation stocks to be described later are given On the other hand, the normal replay wins with a probability of 1/6 and RT3 is maintained, and the special replay wins with a probability of 4/6 and shifts to RT2.

  Next, when a plurality of types of small combinations are won simultaneously, as shown in FIG. 19, a maximum of 4 small combinations determined according to the types of small combinations that are simultaneously selected and the order of stop operations are displayed on the winning line. Control is performed so as to stop evenly within the frame drawing range. FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining reel control when a plurality of small combinations are won simultaneously.

  If left bell 1 (lower right bell + upper bell 6 + upper bell 7) wins and the stop operation is performed by pressing left, the combination of right down bells of the selected small roles is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by middle pressing or right pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 6, the upper bell 7, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line L1.

  If left bell 2 (lower right bell + upper bell 5 + upper bell 8) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing left, the combination of the right falling bells of the selected small roles is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by middle pressing or right pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 5, the upper bell 6, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line L1.

  If left bell 3 (lower right bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 3) is elected and stopped by left-pressing, the combination of right-down bells in the selected small role is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by middle pressing or right pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 2, the upper bell 3, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line L1.

  If left bell 4 (lower right bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 4) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the left button, the combination of right falling bells of the selected small roles is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by middle pressing or right pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 2, the upper bell 4, or the transition result is aligned with the winning line L1.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the configuration symbols of the right-down bell are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all reels, and when the left bells 1 to 4 are elected, a stop operation is performed by pushing left. In this case, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, control is always performed so that the right lowering bell is aligned with the winning line L1, while the symbols constituting the upper bells 1 to 8 are at intervals of 5 frames or more on all reels. Even if the left bells 1 to 4 are elected because there are places that are arranged, if the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle or right, it becomes the drawing range of the constituent symbols of the elected upper bells 1 to 8 If the stop operation is not performed at an appropriate timing, the selected upper bell cannot be aligned with the winning line L1, and in this case, the control is performed so that the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line L1.

  When middle bell 1 (middle bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 5) is elected and a stop operation is performed by pressing the middle bell, control is performed so that the combination of the middle bells of the selected small roles is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped. If a stop operation is performed by left pressing or right pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 2, the upper bell 5, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line L1.

  When middle bell 2 (middle bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 6) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle bell, the control of stopping the combination of the middle bells of the selected small roles on the winning line L1 is performed. If a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or right-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 1, the upper bell 6, or the transition result is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped.

  When middle bell 3 (middle bell + upper bell 4 + upper bell 7) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle bell, the control of stopping the combination of the middle bells of the elected small roles on the winning line L1 is performed. If a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or right-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 4, the upper bell 7, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped.

  When middle bell 4 (middle bell + upper bell 3 + upper bell 8) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle bell, the control of stopping the combination of the middle bells of the elected small roles on the winning line L1 is performed. If a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or right-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 3, the upper bell 8, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the configuration symbols of the middle bell are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all reels, and when the middle bells 1 to 4 are elected, when the stop operation is performed by middle push Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, control is always performed so that the middle bell is aligned with the winning line L1, while the symbols constituting the upper bells 1 to 8 are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or more on all reels. Even if the middle bells 1 to 4 are elected, if the stop operation is performed by pressing left or right, an appropriate range that will be drawn in the constituent symbols of the elected upper bells 1 to 8 will be used. If the stop operation is not performed at the timing, the selected upper bell cannot be aligned with the winning line L1, and in this case, the control is performed so that the shift outcome is aligned with the winning line L1.

  When right bell 1 (middle bell + upper bell 3 + upper bell 5) is elected and a stop operation is performed by pressing right, the combination of the middle bells of the elected small roles is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped. When a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or middle-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 3, the upper bell 5, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped.

  When right bell 2 (middle bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 7) is elected and a stop operation is performed by pressing right, the combination of middle bells among the selected small roles is stopped in alignment with winning line L1. When a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or middle-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 1, the upper bell 7, or the transition result is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped.

  When right bell 3 (middle bell + upper bell 4 + upper bell 6) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing right, the combination of the middle bells of the elected small roles is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped. When a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or middle-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 4, the upper bell 6, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line L1.

  When right bell 4 (middle bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 8) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing right, the combination of the middle bells of the elected small roles is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped. When a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or middle-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 2, the upper bell 8, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the configuration symbols of the middle bell are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all reels, and when the right bell 1 to 4 is won, the right bell is pressed to stop the operation. However, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, control is always performed so that the middle bell is aligned with the winning line L1, while the symbols constituting the upper bells 1 to 8 are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or more on all reels. Therefore, even if the right bells 1 to 4 are elected, if the stop operation is performed by left-pressing or middle-pressing, an appropriate drawing range of the constituent symbols of the elected upper bells 1 to 8 is appropriate. If the stop operation is not performed at the timing, the selected upper bell cannot be aligned with the winning line L1, and in this case, the control is performed so that the shift outcome is aligned with the winning line L1.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when any of the left bell, middle bell, right bell, that is, the push order bell is won, by performing a stop operation in a specific operation mode according to the type of winning combination, While the right-down bell or middle bell always wins, the upper bell may be aligned at a certain rate by performing a stop operation in a mode other than the specific mode according to the type of winning role. There are cases where the bells are not aligned and the transition outcomes are aligned.

  For this reason, at the time of winning the push order bell, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out can be changed depending on whether or not it is operated in a specific operation mode according to the type of winning combination. In other words, even if one of the push order bells is won, it is impossible to intentionally select a specific operation mode unless the type is known. Although a medal can be surely obtained by winning a prize, the upper bell can be won only at a fixed rate at a rate of 2/3, and a medal cannot be surely obtained.

  When RB bell 1 (Right-up bell + Right-up Rivebe) is elected and a stop operation is performed by left-pressing, control is performed to align and stop the combination of right-up bells among the selected small roles on the winning line L1. If a stop operation is performed by pressing the middle or right side, control is performed so that the combination of the right rising rivets is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped.

  If RB Bell 2 (Rising Right + Right Rising + Right Rising) is won and stopped by pressing the middle, the combination of right rising bells of the selected small roles is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by pressing the button to the left, the combination of beveling to the right is stopped to align with the winning line L1, and when the stop operation is performed by pressing the button to the right, Control to stop the combination in line with the winning line L1.

  RB bell 3 (middle bell + lower right bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 3 + upper bell 4 + upper bell 5 + upper bell 6 + upper bell 7 + upper bell 8 + middle watermelon + lower watermelon + upper watermelon + lower cherry + middle cherry +1 sheet role + right-up bell + right-up bevel + right-up bevel), and if the stop operation is performed by pressing right, the combination of the right-up bells of the selected small roles is aligned with the winning line L1. Control to stop is performed, and when stop operation is performed by left-pressing or middle-pressing, control is performed to stop the right-beveled bevel combination aligned with the winning line L1.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the configuration symbols of the right-up bell, the right-up bevel, and the right-up bevel are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all reels, and when the RB bells 1 to 4 are won, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, any combination of a right-up bell, a right-up bevel, and a right-up bevel will be aligned on the pay line L1 and 10 medals will be paid out, but at a rate of 1/3 Only "bell-bell-bell" combinations will be aligned to the right.

  Although not specifically shown, when a bell (middle bell + lower right bell) is won, a combination of “bell-bell-bell” is arranged on the winning line L1 regardless of the stop order of the reels and the operation timing. To be controlled.

  Also, all roles (middle bell + lower right bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 2 + upper bell 3 + upper bell 4 + upper bell 5 + upper bell 6 + upper bell 7 + upper bell 8 + middle watermelon + right lower watermelon + upper watermelon + lower cherry + middle (Cherry + 1 hand + right rising bell + right rising rebebe) is elected, the “Bell-Bell-Bell” combination is controlled to rise to the right regardless of the reel stop order and operation timing. The

  Next, processing executed by the main control unit 41 in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. In the slot machine 1, the game is progressed by repeatedly performing the game processing one game at a time. For this purpose, the game must first be in a state where the game can be progressed.

  In order to be able to advance the game, for example, the set value work is stored in the set value work with the set value in the normal range with the main control unit 41 including the main CPU 41a activated, and the data stored in the RAM 41c. The condition is that there is no abnormality. When the game is in a state where progress is possible, game processing is repeatedly performed in the slot machine 1 game by game. Hereinafter, each game in the slot machine 1 will be described.

  The “game” in the slot machine 1 is, in a narrow sense, a period from when the start switch 7 is operated to when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. Since the setting of the bet number before the operation of No. 7, the payout of medals and the transition of the gaming state are also performed after the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, these incidental processes are also included in the “game” in a broad sense. And

  The game control process is also executed after the power is turned on and a predetermined boot process is performed, or immediately after the setting is changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. When processing of one game is started, first, the number of bets is set by operating the one-sheet BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 or by inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 4, and operating the start switch 7. A BET process for instructing the substantial start of the game is performed.

  If the player has won a replay in the previous game, the same bet number as the previous game is automatically set by the replay game flag (the replay game flag is erased at this stage). In the BET process, every time a bet number is set, a BET command that can specify the number of medals used for setting the bet number is transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  When the number of bets is set by BET processing and the start switch 7 is operated, a random number for internal lottery is extracted, and winnings for each combination determined according to the gaming state are allowed based on the extracted random number value. A lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to do so. In the lottery process, an internal winning command indicating the setting status of the winning flag set in the RAM 41c according to the lottery result is transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  Further, in the lottery process, when any special combination is won, a process for controlling to RT5 or RT6 is performed.

  When the lottery process is completed, a reel rotation process is performed next. In the reel rotation process, the reel motor 32L is provided on the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the previous game. , 32C, 32R are driven, and rotation of all the left, middle, and right reels 2L, 2C, 2R is started.

  When a predetermined condition (detection of the reference position by the reel sensors 33SL, 33SC, 33SR after the rotation speed reaches a constant speed) is established from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R Is enabled. Thereafter, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated by the player, the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stopped, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped.

  In the reel rotation process, a reel rotation command for notifying the start of reel rotation is transmitted to the effect control board 90 when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, and rotation of any one of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped. Each time, a reel stop command capable of specifying the area number of the corresponding stop operation position of the corresponding reel is transmitted to the effect control board 90 to determine which reel has been stopped.

  When the driving of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, a winning determination process is performed for determining whether any role symbol is derived and displayed on the winning line in the display result at the time of stopping. If it is determined in this winning determination process that any of the winning combinations has been won, various processes corresponding to the winnings generated on the game control board 40 are performed.

  In the winning determination process, after the winning determination is made, a winning determination command that can specify the presence / absence of a winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out is sent to the effect control board 90. In the winning determination process, when it is determined that any of the special roles has been won, a process for controlling the corresponding bonus is performed.

  Further, in the winning determination process, when it is determined that the transition outcomes are aligned when RT0 to RT3, a process for shifting to RT4 is performed. Further, when it is determined at RT1 that the fall replay has been won, a process for shifting to RT4 is performed. Further, when it is determined at RT4 that the promotion replay has been won, a process for shifting to RT1 is performed. Further, when it is determined that the special replay is won in RT1 and RT3, processing for shifting to RT2 is performed. Further, when it is determined that the SP replay is won in RT2, processing for shifting to RT3 is performed.

  When the winning determination process ends, a payout process is performed. In the payout process, medals are paid out or credits are added according to the number of payouts set in the winning determination process. However, when the number of credits accumulated as data reaches 50, the hopper motor 34b is driven to pay out an excess number of medals from the medal payout opening 9.

  Also, in the payout process, when the payout of medals is started by payout of winnings or credits (including medals used for setting the number of bets), a payout start command for notifying the start of payout of medals is sent to the effect control board 90. When the medal payout by winning and winning the credit is completed, a payout end command for notifying the end of the medal payout is transmitted to the effect control board 90. In the payout process of the present embodiment, when the player detects the operation of the payment switch 10 (value return operation), a payment detection command for notifying the detection of the operation to the payment switch 10 is sent to the effect control board 90. Sent.

  In the payout process, a bonus end determination process for determining whether or not a bonus end condition corresponding to the bonus is satisfied during the bonus is performed as various processes not related to winning.

  In the bonus end determination process, when it is determined that the bonus end condition is satisfied, a process for controlling to the preparation mode is performed.

  In the payout process, a game state command that can specify the game state of the next game is transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  Also, in the payout process, a winning flag that does not carry over (a winning combination of a small combination or replaying combination) is deleted, and a bonus winning flag stored in a special work is not deleted. As a result, the bonus winning flag is carried over to the next game until the winning bonus is won. At the end of the payout process, that is, at the end of one game, a game state command indicating the game state of the next game is sent to the effect control board 90. Then, the process for one game ends, and the process for the next one game starts.

  In the repetition of the game as described above, the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40 shifts the game state among RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, RT4, RT5, RT6, and bonus, and the progress of the game A command is transmitted to the effect control board 90 according to the situation. On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 of the effect control board 90 performs various processes based on the command received from the game control board 40.

  Next, processing executed by the sub control unit 91 will be described. The sub-control unit 91 first executes a predetermined effect initial setting process, and after performing an effect control restoration process for restoring the control state in the effect control board 90 to the state when the power supply is stopped, the effect-side random value Repeat the update process.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 generates an interrupt for controlling the progress of the production at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the reset / interrupt controller sets the timer interrupt flag of the RAM 91c to the ON state. Then, the effect control interruption process is executed. In the effect control interrupt process, the contents of the internal register are saved, the effect backup process is executed, and when the sub control unit 91 is restarted, the data required for restoring the control state before the restart is backed up. Is done.

  Further, command analysis processing for analyzing various commands transmitted from the game control board 40 is executed, and predetermined effect control processing is executed. By this effect control process, various game effects are performed by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51 and generating sound from the speakers 53 and 54 according to the progress of the game in the slot machine 1. Image element data and moving image data for performing a game effect are stored in a predetermined ROM.

  In order to perform a game effect, the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91 has various counters, areas for setting various flags, a game state command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, and an internal winning command. Area for storing the winning status of the game, the combination of the display results derived to the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the information indicating whether or not a winning has occurred, and the game state applied in the game running on the game control board 40 side (The winning situation and the gaming state are twice) are also provided in the RAM 91c.

  Further, in the effect control board 90, a stop symbol table for determining the display result of the variable display device 2 based on the reel stop command is provided in the RAM 91c. However, since the reel stop command includes only the type of the stopped reel and the number of the symbol stopped in the middle as information, it is not possible to determine what symbol is stopped by this alone. For this reason, the ROM 91b stores in advance a table showing all symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. With reference to this table, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped on the stop symbol table. The symbol is registered. The sub-control unit 91 produces an effect based on the registration information of the stop symbol table.

  In addition, various random values counted by a random number circuit (not shown) or the like are updated on the side of the effect control board 90, and then the contents of the saved register are restored, and then the effect control interrupt process ends.

  In the effect control process executed in the effect control interrupt process, the sub-control unit 91 executes the above-described game effect according to the AT control process for controlling the effect state to the AT according to the game state, etc. A game effect execution process is performed for this purpose.

  The sub-control unit 91 performs an AT lottery to determine whether or not to control the AT by executing an AT lottery process included in the AT control process. In the AT lottery process, it is determined whether or not a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied based on a command from the main control unit 41, and the AT lottery is executed when the predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. In the AT lottery, it is determined whether to give the number of navigation stocks and how much the number of navigation stocks is given.

  The number of navigation stocks indicates a period during which the AT can be controlled. By consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stocks, the AT is controlled for a predetermined number of games (30G, 50G, 70G, 90G, 111G, 222G, 333G, and 555G in this embodiment), during which the navigation effect is executed. Is done. For this reason, it can be said that the greater the determined number of navigation stocks, the higher the degree of advantage for the player because the AT is controlled over a longer period.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining an example of a lottery condition that triggers the AT lottery. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining an example of a table referred to in the AT lottery.

  The AT lottery condition is satisfied when a cherry (weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry) or SP replay is won at RT0 to RT4.

  When the gaming state is RT0 to 4 and the lottery mode is the normal mode (weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry) or when the SP replay is won and the AT lottery condition is satisfied, FIG. AT lottery is performed with reference to the table. For example, the sub-control unit 91 identifies RT0 to RT4 based on the game state command from the main control unit 41, and cherry (weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry) or SP replay based on the internal winning command. Identify that you won. In addition, the sub control unit 91 specifies that the lottery mode is the normal mode based on the value of the lottery mode flag set in the RAM 91c.

  When the table shown in FIG. 21A is referenced, if the winning combination is a weak cherry, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 0 at a rate of 95%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 5%. Thus, the AT lottery is performed, and the expected number of navigation stocks that can be expected to be obtained in one AT lottery is 0.05 (= 0 × 95% + 1 × 5%).

  When the table shown in FIG. 21A is referenced, if the winning combination is a strong cherry, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 0 at a rate of 70%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 20%. The AT lottery will be held so that the number of Navistock will be determined to be 2 at the rate of 8%, and the number of Navistock will be determined to be 3 at the rate of 2%, and it is expected to be won by one AT lottery The number of expected navigation stocks to be obtained is configured to be 0.42 (= 0 × 70% + 1 × 20% + 2 × 8% + 3 × 2%) from the sum of the number of navigation stocks × winning rate.

  When the table shown in FIG. 21 (a) is referred to, if the winning combination is a middle cherry or SP replay, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 70%, and the number of navigation stocks is 2 at a rate of 20%. The AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 10%, and the expected number of navigation stocks that can be expected to be acquired in one AT lottery is the number of navigation stocks × The sum of the winning rates is 1.4 (= 0 × 70% + 1 × 20% + 2 × 8% + 3 × 2%).

  When the game state is RT0 to 4 and the lottery mode is the high probability A mode, when the cherry (weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry) or SP replay is won and the AT lottery condition is satisfied, FIG. AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG. For example, the sub-control unit 91 identifies RT0 to RT4 based on the game state command from the main control unit 41, and cherry (weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry) or SP replay based on the internal winning command. Identify that you won. Further, the sub-control unit 91 specifies that the lottery mode is the high probability A mode based on the value of the lottery mode flag set in the RAM 91c.

  When the table shown in FIG. 21B is referenced, if the winning combination is a weak cherry, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 0 at a rate of 70%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 20%. The AT lottery will be held so that the number of Navistock will be determined to be 2 at the rate of 8%, and the number of Navistock will be determined to be 3 at the rate of 2%, and it is expected to be won by one AT lottery. The number of expected navigation stocks to be obtained is configured to be 0.42 (= 0 × 70% + 1 × 20% + 2 × 8% + 3 × 2%) from the sum of the number of navigation stocks × winning rate.

  When the table shown in FIG. 21B is referenced, if the winning combination is a strong cherry, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at 70% and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 2 at 20%. AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 10%, and the expected number of navigation stocks that can be expected to be obtained in one AT lottery is the number of navigation stocks × winning rate From the sum, it is configured to be 1.4 (= 0 × 70% + 1 × 20% + 2 × 8% + 3 × 2%).

  When the table shown in FIG. 21 (b) is referenced, if the winning combination is a middle-stage cherry or SP replay, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 2 at a rate of 80% and the number of navigation stocks is 3 at a rate of 20%. As shown, the AT lottery is performed, and the expected number of Navi stocks that can be expected to be acquired in one AT lottery is 2.2 (= 2 × 80) from the sum of the Navi stock number × winning rate. % + 3 × 20%).

  When the gaming state is RT0 to 4 and the lottery mode is the high probability B mode, when the cherry (weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry) or SP replay is won and the AT lottery condition is satisfied, FIG. AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG. For example, the sub-control unit 91 identifies RT0 to RT4 based on the game state command from the main control unit 41, and cherry (weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry) or SP replay based on the internal winning command. Identify that you won. Further, the sub-control unit 91 specifies that the lottery mode is the high probability B mode based on the value of the lottery mode flag set in the RAM 91c.

  When the table shown in FIG. 21 (c) is referenced, if the winning combination is a weak cherry, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at a rate of 70%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 2 at a rate of 20%. AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 10%, and the expected number of navigation stocks that can be expected to be obtained in one AT lottery is the number of navigation stocks × winning rate From the sum, it is configured to be 1.4 (= 0 × 70% + 1 × 20% + 2 × 8% + 3 × 2%).

  When the table shown in FIG. 21 (c) is referred to, if the winning combination is a strong cherry, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 2 at a rate of 80%, and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 20%. In this way, the AT lottery is performed, and the expected number of Navi stocks that can be expected to be obtained in one AT lottery is 2.2 (= 2 × 80% + 3 × 20%).

  When the table shown in FIG. 21 (c) is referred to, RT0, 1, 4 are used, and if the winning combination is a middle-stage cherry or SP replay, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 100%. The AT lottery is performed, and the number of expected navigation stocks that can be expected to be obtained in one AT lottery is configured to be 3 (= 3 × 100%) from the sum of the navigation stock number × winning rate. ing.

  When the table shown in FIG. 21 (c) is referred to, RT2 and RT3, and if the winning combination is SP replay, the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 1 at 70% and navigation stocks at a rate of 20%. As the number is determined to be 2 and the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 10%, the AT lottery is performed, and the expected number of navigation stocks that can be expected to be acquired in one AT lottery is It is configured to be 1.4 (= 0 × 70% + 1 × 20% + 2 × 8% + 3 × 2%) from the sum of the stock number × winning rate.

  As described above, when the gaming state is RT0 to 4 and the lottery mode is the high probability A mode, it can be expected that the number of navigation stocks is larger than that in the normal mode. Furthermore, when the lottery mode is the high probability B mode, it is possible to expect a larger number of navigation stocks than the normal mode and the high probability A mode.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the AT lottery condition is satisfied at the end of the BB.

  When the AT lottery condition is satisfied by the end of BB, the AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG. The sub-control unit 91 specifies the end of BB based on, for example, a game state command from the main control unit 41.

  When the table shown in FIG. 21D is referred to, at the end of BB1 to 3 (at the end of BB accompanying winning of BB1 to BB3), the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 0 at a rate of 70%. The AT lottery was held so that the number of Navistock was determined to be 1 at 20%, the number of Navistock was determined to be 2 at 5%, and the number of Navistock was determined to be 3 at 5%. The expected number of Navi stocks that can be expected in one AT lottery is 0.45 (= 0 × 70% + 1 × 20% + 2 × 5% + 3 × 5) from the sum of Navistock number × winning rate %).

  When the table shown in FIG. 21D is referred to, at the end of BB4 (at the end of BB accompanying the winning of BB4), the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 100%. A lottery is performed, and the expected number of Navi stocks that can be expected to be obtained in one AT lottery is configured to be 3 (= 3 × 100%) from the sum of the Navi stock number × winning rate .

  As described above, at the end of BB1 to BB3, the winning of navigation stock can be expected, while at the end of BB4, the winning of three navigation stocks is confirmed.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the AT lottery condition is satisfied at the end of RB (excluding BBRB).

  When the AT lottery condition is satisfied by the end of the RB, the AT lottery is performed with reference to the table shown in FIG. The sub-control unit 91 specifies the end of the RB based on, for example, a game state command from the main control unit 41.

  When the table shown in FIG. 21E is referred to, AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined at a winning rate corresponding to the number of winning / losing points described later given during RB.

Specifically, at 0 to 7 points, the AT lottery is performed so that the navigation stock number is determined to be 0 at 95% and the navigation stock number is determined to be 1 at 5%. The expected number of Navi stocks that can be expected to be obtained in the lottery is calculated from the sum of the Navi stock number x winning rate.
It is configured to be 0.05 (= 0 × 95% + 1 × 5%).

  In 8-15 points, the number of Navistock is determined to be 0 at a rate of 70%, the number of Navistock is determined to be 1 at a rate of 20%, and the number of Navistock is determined to be 2 at a rate of 8%. AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at the ratio of, and the expected number of navigation stocks that can be expected to be acquired in one AT lottery is calculated from the sum of the number of navigation stocks × winning rate, It is configured to be 0.42 (= 0 × 70% + 1 × 20% + 2 × 8% + 3 × 2%).

  At 16-23 points, the number of Navistock is determined to be 1 at 70%, the number of Navistock is determined to be 2 at 20%, and the number of Navistock is determined to be 3 at 10%. The number of expected navigation stocks that can be expected to be acquired in one AT lottery is 1.4 (= 0 × 70% + 1 × 20% + 2) from the sum of the number of navigation stocks × winning rate. × 8% + 3 × 2%).

  At 24-31 points, the AT lottery is performed so that the navigation stock number is determined to be 2 at 80% and the navigation stock number is determined to be 3 at 20%. The number of expected navigation stocks that can be expected to be configured is 2.2 (= 2 × 80% + 3 × 20%), based on the sum of the number of navigation stocks × the winning rate.

  At 32 points or more, AT lottery is performed so that the number of navigation stocks is determined to be 3 at a rate of 100%, and the expected number of navigation stocks that can be expected to be acquired in one AT lottery is the number of navigation stocks X It is configured to be 3 (= 3 x 100%) from the sum of the winning rates.

  As described above, at the end of the RB, the expected value of the winning number of the navigation stock differs depending on the number of winning / losing points acquired during the RB, and the more the winning / losing point number, the more winning the number of navigation stocks can be expected. In particular, if you win 16 or more points, you will win 1 or more Navi stocks. If you win 32 or more points, you will win 3 or more Navi stocks. Is confirmed.

  The sub-control unit 91 performs an effect called “Janken Chance” in each game during the RB. The janken chance is determined by janken according to the winning combination of the game and the first stop reel selected by the player, and the aforementioned winning / losing points are given according to the result.

  FIG. 22 (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between winning combination, stop order and win / loss in Janken chance, and FIG. 22 (b) is a diagram showing the number of winning / losing points given according to the opponent, FIG. 22C is a diagram showing display contents according to the result of winning or losing.

  The sub-control unit 91 first performs an opponent selection lottery for selecting an opponent when the game is started when a chance is played. The opponent consists of A and B. As shown in FIG. 22 (b), when B is selected than when A is selected as the opponent, it is given in the case of winning and a draw A lot of winning and losing points are set.

  When the opponent is determined, the opponent is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the winning combination is RB1 to RB3, “go” corresponds to the left reel, “choki” corresponds to the middle reel, right “Par” corresponding to each reel is displayed as an ally card.

  Then, according to the winning combination and the first stop reel selected by the player, the opponent's card is displayed. If the ally card wins, it wins, and if the ally cart and the opponent's card are the same, a draw If you lose a friendly card, you lose.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 22 (a), if the RB bell 1 is elected and the first stop is the left reel, the win is won. If the first stop is the middle reel, the draw is made and the first stop is made. If it is a right reel, it is determined to lose.

  Also, if RB Bell 2 is elected and the first stop is the left reel, it will be lost, if the first stop is the middle reel, it will be won, and if the first stop is the right reel, it will be a draw. It has been established.

  Also, if RB Bell 3 is elected and the first stop is the left reel, it will be a draw, if the first stop is the middle reel, it will be lost, and if the first stop is the right reel, it will be won. It has been established.

  As described above, when the RB bell 1 is won and the stop operation is performed by pressing the left button, the combination of the right-up bells among the selected small roles is controlled so as to be aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by pressing, the control is performed so that the combination of the right rising rivets is aligned with the winning line L1, and the RB bell 2 is selected. When the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle, the selected small In the combination, control is performed to stop the right-upward bell combination aligned with the winning line L1, and when the stop operation is performed by pressing the left button, the control is performed to stop the right-upward beveled combination aligned with the winning line L1. When a stop operation is performed by pressing the right button, control is performed so that the combination of the right-up rivets is aligned with the pay line L1, and the RB bell 3 is selected. If performed, control is performed so that the combination of right-up bells in the selected small role is aligned with the winning line L1 and stopped, and if the stop operation is performed by pressing left or middle, the combination of right-up bevel is awarded. Control to stop the line L1 is performed.

  Therefore, in Janken Chance, when the bells are aligned to the right, the teammates win, the bells are not aligned to the right, and “Bell-Bell-Replay / Plum” or “Replay / Plum-Bell” are to the right. -If you have a combination of "bells", you will draw or lose an ally card. That is, the combination of symbols stopped on the reel is linked to the winning or losing chance of the Janken chance in the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, when the winning combination is not RB1 to RB3 but all roles or is out of play, that is, when no winning combination is selected, when the opponent is determined, the opponent is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. “Go” is displayed as a friendly card corresponding to each of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. In this case, “Choki” is always displayed as the opponent's card, and the team always wins. At this time, if the winning combination is all roles, the bells will always be aligned to the right, and if they are off, none of the combinations will be aligned with the winning line L1, but “Black 7-Black 7” will increase to the right. -Black 7 "combination is ready.

  As described above, the number of winning / losing points given when the teammate card wins differs depending on the opponent selected at the start of the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22B, when the opponent is won, 4 points are awarded if the opponent is A, and 8 points are awarded if the opponent is B. In the case of a draw, if the opponent is A, 1 point is awarded, and if the opponent is B, 2 points are awarded. In the case of losing, no winning or losing points are awarded regardless of whether the opponent is A or B.

  In addition, when winning all roles, not only 4 points (8 points if the opponent is B) associated with winning, but also + α is 1 to 4 points (2, 4, 6, 8 if the opponent is B) One of the points). These points are allocated equally. Furthermore, in the case of losing, in addition to 16 points, 1 to 4 points (any of 4, 8, 12, 16 if the opponent is B) are given as + α. These points are allocated equally.

  As mentioned above, in the AT lottery at the end of the RB, winning of one or more Navistock will be confirmed with 16 points or more, so one or more will be won by winning 4 or more opponents or pulling out. The winning of Navistock will be confirmed.

  In addition, as described above, when the opponent is B, more wins / loss points will be awarded if the opponent wins or draws, but once the opponent is selected in the opponent selection lottery When B is selected as an opponent, a table with a high ratio of selecting B is selected from the next time onward, and more win / loss points can be expected thereafter.

  In addition, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a winning / losing history of Janken chance over a period of RB, and a winning count number indicating the winning expectation degree of Navistock according to the result of Janken chance.

In the game history of Janken Chance, “X” is displayed corresponding to the losing game, “△” is displayed corresponding to the draw game, “◯” is displayed corresponding to the game winning “A”, and the game winning “B”. ◎ is displayed corresponding to, and the symbol “7” is displayed corresponding to the missed game.

  The winning count is +0 when losing a chance, +1 when winning, +1 when winning A, +2 when winning B, and +4 when losing. As mentioned above, 4 points will be awarded if you win A, 8 points will be awarded if you win B, 16 points will be awarded if you lose, and one or more navigation stocks will be won if you win more than 16 points. Since the winning count is 4 or more, winning of one or more navigation stocks is confirmed. On the other hand, even if the winning / losing point is less than 16 points, the winning of the Navistock can be expected. Therefore, even if the winning counter is less than 4 at the end of the RB, the winning of the Navistock can be expected.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the lottery condition is satisfied is determined by the AT lottery process performed by the sub-control unit 91. When the lottery condition is satisfied, the AT lottery is performed.

  When the number of navigation stocks of 1 or more is determined in the AT lottery, the sub-control unit 91 stores an AT flag indicating the AT and the number of navigation stocks in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. Based on the AT flag in the RAM 91c, the sub-control unit 91 specifies whether or not to control to AT, and specifies the remaining number of navigation stocks. When the AT flag indicating AT is set, it is possible to control the AT by consuming one navigation stock number.

  When the number of navigation stocks is acquired when the AT flag indicating AT is set, the number of navigation stocks acquired this time is added to the number of navigation stocks specified from the AT flag.

  For example, when an AT lottery is performed when an AT flag indicating that the AT is set, the AT flag corresponding to the result of the AT lottery is updated. Updating to the AT flag corresponding to the AT lottery result is, for example, adding the number of navigation stocks corresponding to the result of the current AT lottery to the number of navigation stocks specified from the AT flag stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. It may be possible to rewrite the number of navigation stocks to an AT flag that specifies the number of navigation stocks, and any method may be used as long as the current AT flag according to the result of the AT lottery can be specified.

  The sub-control unit 91 manages the control to the AT based on the AT flag set according to the result of the AT lottery by performing the AT management process included in the AT control process when RT1 to RT4. .

  Specifically, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT to be AT when it is specified from the AT flag that it is AT. That is, when navigation stock remains, AT control is started. During the period from RT4 to RT2, the navigation effect can be executed under the control of the AT without consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stocks.

  When controlled by the AT and controlled by RT1 and RT2, the start condition for the AT by consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stock is satisfied, and a predetermined number of games (in this embodiment, Until the navigation effect of the number of games won in the number-of-games lottery described later) is executed, it is controlled to ART which is advantageous RT and AT. When the number of navigation stock is consumed, it is updated to an AT flag indicating the number of navigation stock subtracted by 1.

  The sub-control unit 91 executes the navigation effect executed by the navigation stock when the navigation stock is consumed by 1 in the AT management process, that is, when the transition from RT1 to RT2 or when a predetermined number of games have elapsed in RT2. A game number lottery for determining the number of games is executed.

  The number-of-games lottery is to determine the number of games of 30G, 50G, 70G, 90G, 111G, 222G, 333G, and 555G by lottery, and is performed with reference to Tables 1 to 4 shown in FIG. When table 1 is referenced, the average number of games selected is about 40G. When table 2 is referenced, the average number of games selected is about 45G. When table 3 is referenced, the average number selected. The number of games is about 50G, and when the table 4 is referenced, the average number of games selected is determined to be about 60G.

  These tables 1 to 4 are transferred to a table having a larger average number of games by winning a table transfer lottery. As a trigger for the table transfer lottery, even if the navigation stock remains in the AT, the latent lottery is won and the navigation effect is not executed. If the game shifts to RT4 once, the normal replay is performed during the AT. There are cases where a prize has been won more than a certain number of times. Then, these tables are transferred to a table with a small average number of games when, for example, the transition outcomes are complete in a state where RT4 and no navigation stock remain.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 consumes one navigation stock, and executes a game number notification effect for notifying the determined number of AT games when the number of AT games is determined by the number-of-games lottery. In the game number notification effect, when one navigation stock is consumed, the player is prompted to operate the effect switch 56, and the effect is to notify the number of games in response to the operation of the effect switch 56. It is.

  In the game number notification effect, if the number of games won in the game number lottery is 90 or less, the number of games won in response to one operation of the effect switch 56 is notified, and 111 or more If the number of games is won, after 90 games have been informed once, the operation of the effect switch 56 is further urged and finally determined in response to the operation of the effect switch 56 in that state. The number of games played is notified, and the player's expectation can be further enhanced.

  Note that, when the betting number setting operation is performed without operating the effect switch 56 and the game number notification effect is cancelled, the game number is counted while displaying “????” as the game number. Is started, and an effect is struck as to whether or not the AT ends for each number of games that can be won in the game number lottery. For this reason, the player can know the number of AT games accompanying the navigation stock by operating the effect switch 56 at the time of consumption of the navigation stock, and can operate the effect switch 56 without operating the effect switch 56. By canceling the notification effect, it is possible to choose not to know how long it will last until the AT ends and to maintain the expectation until the end.

  The sub-control unit 91 stores the number of games won in the game number lottery in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. The sub-control unit 91 controls to AT during a period until the number of games in the RAM 91c becomes zero. When the number of games remains and the target role of navigation is won, a navigation effect is executed.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 performs AT management processing, and controls to non-AT when the remaining number of games becomes 0 in ART. At this time, if the number of navigation stocks indicated by the AT flag is 0, it is updated to the AT flag indicating that it is not AT. In other words, a series of AT termination conditions are satisfied when the AT flag for controlling from AT to non-AT is 0.

  When it is specified from the AT flag when it is controlled to be non-AT that it is not AT, it is not controlled again by the AT and the navigation effect is not executed. Thereby, when it is RT2, there is a higher possibility that the transition outcomes will be aligned, and the possibility of being controlled by RT4 is increased.

  On the other hand, if the number of navigation stocks specified from the AT flag when controlled to non-AT is 1 or more, when the target role of the navigation effect is won, 1 is consumed and the number of games is drawn. The AT is controlled until a navigation effect is performed over the number of won games. Then, the number of navigation stocks is also 0, and the number of navigations is also 0, so that the AT ends.

  The sub-control unit 91 executes a navigation effect by winning the navigation target combination corresponding to the gaming state when the AT flag is specified by the AT management process. The navigation target combination corresponding to the game state is replay GR1 to 6 when RT4, replay GR11 to 16 and replay GR21 to 25 when RT1, and replay GR31 to 36 when RT2. In RT1-4, the push order bell is a common navigation target combination.

  As a navigation effect when winning the replays GR1 to GR6, a push order (see FIG. 18) for winning the promoted replay according to the winning situation is notified. For example, a message such as “left middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR1. In addition, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR2, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR3 is won, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 4 is won, a message such as “middle right left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR5, a message such as “middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 6 is won, a message such as “Right Middle Left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As a navigation effect when the replays GR11 to 16 are won, a push order (see FIG. 18) for winning the promoted replay according to the winning situation is notified. For example, a message such as “left middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR11. Further, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR 12, a message such as “Middle right and left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR 13, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR 14, a message such as “middle right left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 15 is won, a message such as “middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 16 is won, a message such as “right middle left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As a navigation effect when the replays GR21 to 25 are won, a push order (see FIG. 18) for winning a special replay according to the winning situation is notified. For example, a message “left middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR 21. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 22 is won, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when the replay GR 23 is won. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 24 is won, a message such as “middle right left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 25 is won, a message such as “Right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As a navigation effect (excluding RT3) when the replays GR31 to 36 are won, the push order (see FIG. 18) for winning the SP replay according to the winning situation is notified. For example, a message such as “left middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when the replay GR 31 is won. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 32 is won, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 33 is won, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR 34, a message such as “middle right left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR 35, a message such as “middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 36 is won, a message such as “right middle left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, as a navigation effect when one of the push order bells is won, a push order (see FIG. 19) for surely winning a right-down bell or a middle bell is notified. For example, when winning the left bell, the left reel is stopped as the first stop reel, so that the right falling bell can be reliably won, so “left!” For stopping the left reel as the first stop reel. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, when the middle bell is won, the middle bell can be surely won by stopping the middle reel as the first stop reel, so “medium!” For stopping the middle reel as the first stop reel. A message is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Also, when the right bell is won, the middle bell can be reliably won by stopping the right reel as the first stop reel, so “right!” For stopping the right reel as the first stop reel. A message is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As described above, in the navigation effect according to the present embodiment, a message reminiscent of an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is notified in the same mode regardless of the type of the navigation target role. For this reason, the player can operate in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player without being conscious of the type of the winning navigation target combination.

  In addition, the aspect of a navigation effect is not restricted to such an aspect, What kind of thing may be sufficient if a player is distinguishable according to a winning condition. In addition, the navigation effect is not limited to what is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and may be executed using the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, and the like.

  Then, by executing the navigation effect, it is possible to make the promotion replay winning, the special replay winning, the SP replay winning, the bell winning selected intentionally, and avoid the falling replay winning.

  In the AT control process, the sub-control unit 91 performs a lottery mode lottery that determines whether the AT lottery mode is the normal mode, the high probability A mode, or the high probability B mode. In the lottery mode lottery, based on a command from the main control unit 41, whether a predetermined lottery condition (in this embodiment, a watermelon (weak watermelon, strong watermelon) is won at RT0 to 4 or at the end of AT) is established. It is determined whether or not a lottery mode lottery is executed.

  As described above, the lottery mode indicates the winning probability of the number of navigation stocks applied to the AT lottery. The higher probability A mode than the normal mode and the higher probability B mode than the high probability mode A can be expected to acquire a larger number of navigation stocks.

  When the lottery mode lottery condition is established by winning the weak watermelon at RT0 to 4, the lottery mode lottery is performed with reference to the table corresponding to the weak watermelon in FIG. The sub-control unit 91 specifies RT0 to RT4 based on, for example, a game state command from the main control unit 41, and specifies a weak watermelon winning based on the internal winning command.

  When the table corresponding to the weak watermelon in FIG. 24 is referenced, the normal mode is determined at a rate of 50%, the high probability A mode is determined at a rate of 40%, and the high probability B mode is determined at a rate of 10%. As described above, a lottery mode lottery is performed.

  When the lottery mode lottery condition is established by winning the strong watermelon at RT0 to RT4, the lottery mode lottery is performed with reference to the table corresponding to the strong watermelon in FIG. For example, the sub-control unit 91 specifies RT0 to 4 based on the game state command from the main control unit 41, and specifies strong watermelon winning based on the internal winning command.

  When the table corresponding to the strong watermelon in FIG. 24 is referred to, the lottery mode lottery is performed so that the high probability A mode is determined at a rate of 50% and the high probability B mode is determined at a rate of 50%. .

  When the lottery mode lottery condition is satisfied by the end of AT, the lottery mode lottery is performed with reference to the table corresponding to the AT end of FIG. The sub-control unit 91 specifies the AT end based on the AT flag and the number of remaining games, for example.

  When the table corresponding to the AT end in FIG. 24 is referred to, the lottery mode lottery is performed so that the high probability A mode is determined at a rate of 80% and the high probability B mode is determined at a rate of 20%. .

  When the high probability modes A and B are controlled, the mode drop lottery is performed at the time of the normal replay winning of RT0, 1, 2, 4 and the high probability mode A is selected. For example, the normal mode is shifted to the normal mode with a probability of about 1/9 at the time of the normal replay winning. If it is RT0, 1, or 4, it will shift to the high probability mode A with a probability of about 1/3 at the time of the normal replay winning, and if it is RT2, the high probability mode A with a probability of about 1/20 at the time of the normal replay winning. Migrate to

  In the sub-control unit 91, as described above, when the SP replay is won, an AT lottery is performed and a winning of one or more navigation stock numbers is acquired. Furthermore, when SP replay wins at RT2, one or more navigation stocks can be acquired, and the winning probability of replay GRs 31 to 36 that allow SP replay shifts to RT3 higher than RT2.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the sub-control unit 91 controls to any one of the no-navigation section, the partial navigation section, and the entire navigation section in RT3.

  The section without navigation is a section without any navigation when the replays GR31 to 36 are selected. In RT3, winning the special replay will shift to RT2, so if the replay GR31-36 is won in the no-navigation section, the SP replay wins with a probability of 1/6 and the navigation stock is 1 One or more of them are given, and a normal replay wins with a probability of 1/6. Together, RT3 is maintained with a probability of 1/3, while a special replay wins with a probability of 4/6. It will shift to RT2 with probability.

  The partial navigation section is a section in which partial navigation is performed in which only the first stop reel that can maintain at least RT3 when the replays GR31 to 36 are selected is notified. For this reason, when replay GR31-36 is elected in a partial navigation section, the SP replay wins with a probability of 1/2 by stopping the first stop reel notified by partial navigation first. One or more navigation stocks are given, and even if SP replay does not win, normal replay wins with a probability of 1/2 and RT3 is maintained.

  The whole navigation section is a section in which full navigation is performed in which the push order that can win the SP replay when the replays GR31 to 36 are won is notified. For this reason, if the replays GR31 to 36 are won in all navigation sections, the reels are stopped in the order informed by the entire navigation, so that the SP replay will win and at least one navigation stock will be given. It becomes.

  In addition, a partial navigation in which a first stop reel that can maintain the RT3 at the time of winning the replays GR31 to 36 in the partial navigation section is executed, and the SP is performed when the replays GR31 to 36 are selected in the entire navigation section. All navigation to notify the push order that allows the replay to be awarded is executed, but the notification mode in these partial navigations and all navigations is also the same mode as the navigation effect described above It may be good or different.

  Also, in RT3, in any section, when the push order bell is won, the navigation effect described above is executed, so if the stop operation is performed in the notified order, the process proceeds from RT3 to RT4. There is no end to it.

  In addition, while controlled by RT3, the number of AT games does not advance even if some navigation, all navigation, and navigation effects are executed. The number of Navistock is never digested.

  When shifting to RT3, the sub-control unit 91 first determines whether to control to a no-navigation section, a partial navigation section, or an entire navigation section. These differ in the proportion of sections controlled according to the state before the transition to RT3. For example, in this embodiment, if the state before the transition is non-AT, the no-navigation section, the partial navigation section, and the entire navigation section are determined equally, and if the state before the transition is AT, the partial navigation section Or all navigation sections are determined equally. If the state before the transition is AT and the lottery mode is the high probability mode B, the entire navigation section is determined.

  When the transition to a partial navigation section or the entire navigation section is determined, a navigation number lottery for determining the remaining number of partial navigations or all navigations is performed. The number of times of winning the navigation is stored in the RAM 91c, and 1 is subtracted every time the replay GR 31-36 is selected and a partial navigation or a full navigation is executed.

  In the present embodiment, when the shift to the partial navigation section or the entire navigation section is determined, the navigation number lottery is performed, and the partial navigation or the entire navigation is executed for the selected number of navigation times. The number of times of navigation may be determined as the number of times of navigation without performing the number of times of navigation. In addition, when the replay GRs 31 to 36 are won in the partial navigation section or the entire navigation section, a navigation execution lottery for determining whether or not to execute the partial navigation or the entire navigation is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which all navigation is performed, and when the transition to a partial navigation section or all navigation sections is determined, the winning probability of the navigation execution lottery is determined from a plurality of different probabilities.

  Moreover, once it shifts to all the navigation sections, it shifts to a part navigation section when the number of times of navigation becomes 0 without shifting to other sections until the number of navigations won at that time becomes 0. . When all navigation sections are finished, skip all navigation sections and move to no-navigation sections without skipping some navigation sections. To do. When a transition is made from the entire navigation section to the partial navigation section, the navigation frequency lottery is performed again, and the navigation frequency of the partial navigation section is determined. When the number of times of navigation in a part of the navigation section is also zero, the transition is made to the section without navigation, during which the replays GR31 to 36 are elected, and the special replay wins to transition to RT2.

  Also, if a role with a relatively low probability of winning, such as cherry or watermelon, is won in a non-navigation section or a partial navigation section, if there is no navigation section, a partial navigation section or a partial navigation section In the section, the section promotion lottery that decides whether or not to be promoted to all navigation sections is performed, and by winning, if there is no navigation section, some navigation sections or all navigation sections, some navigation sections Then, it shifts to the whole navigation section. In addition, even if some navigation sections are not promoted to all navigation sections, a lottery will be added to the number of navigations, and if you win, the number of winning will be added to the number of navigations Yes. In addition, if a role with a relatively low probability of winning such as cherry or watermelon is won in all navigation sections, a lottery will be added to the number of navigations, and if won, the number of times won will be added to the number of navigations. It has become.

  In this embodiment, in a no-navigation section or a partial navigation section, if a role with a relatively low winning probability such as cherry or watermelon is elected, if there is no navigation section, a partial navigation section or an entire navigation section, In some Navi sections, a lottery for the promotion of sections to determine whether or not to be promoted to all Navi sections and a lottery with an additional number of navigations are performed, but in some Navi sections, SP Replay was won by oneself If the answer is correct in the order of pushing the SP replay on its own, or if the normal replay or SP replay is won on its own in the no-navigation section, that is, if the normal replay or SP replay is awarded on its own, You may make it perform a promotion lottery or an addition lottery.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the transition status of the navigation section in RT3.

  For example, at the time of transition to RT3, when the transition to the partial navigation section is determined and two times are won in the navigation number lottery, the transition to the partial navigation section is performed, and the remaining number of navigation times is two. When the replays GR31 to 34 are elected in this state, a partial navigation in which only the first stop reel capable of maintaining RT3 is notified is executed, and by performing a stop operation accordingly, RT3 is maintained and the remaining number of times of navigation is maintained. Is once.

  In this state, if the cherries are won, promoted to all navigation sections, and once won in the navigation count lottery, the system shifts to all navigation sections, and the remaining navigation count is one. When the replays GR31 to 34 are elected in this state, RT3 is maintained and RT3 is maintained by performing a stop operation in accordance with the stop order in which the stop order capable of winning the SP replay is notified. And one or more navigation stocks will be given. Then, the remaining number of times of navigation is 0, and a shift is made to a part of the navigation section, so the number of navigation times is selected. If the number of times of navigation is selected three times, the system shifts to a partial navigation section, and the remaining number of times of navigation is three. In this state, the watermelon is won and there is no promotion to all navigation, but if the number of navigation times is added and the lottery is won once, some navigation sections are maintained and the number of navigation times is increased to 4 times. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in RT3, when the replays GR31 to 36 are selected, one or more SP replays are awarded, and a special replay winning that will shift to RT2 is avoided. Only the first stop reel capable of avoiding a special replay winning that will shift to at least RT2 when winning the replay GR31-36, all navigation sections in which all navigation in which the stop order is notified is executed. When there is a partial navigation section in which some of the informed navigation is executed, no navigation section in which none of the information is reported, and when it is first controlled to all navigation sections, immediately after the end of all navigation sections, Since there is a transition to a partial navigation section without a transition, even if all the navigation sections are terminated, all notifications are not terminated immediately, By being controlled in the section, because its own at a by winning the SP replay while avoiding the transition to RT2 becomes possible to acquire the navigation stock, it is possible to enhance the interest in RT3 effectively.

  Further, in the state where the number of navigations in all navigation sections remains in RT3, that is, the number of all navigations in which the stop order in which the SP replay is won and the navigation stock can be acquired is informed remains one. There is no transition to the partial navigation section or the no-navigation section, and the transition to the partial navigation section is always made after the number of navigations reaches zero, even though the number of navigations for all navigation sections remains. Therefore, the player can surely digest the number of navigations in the entire navigation section without shifting to a partial navigation section or a section without navigation that is disadvantageous to the entire navigation section.

  In RT3, the condition for avoiding the transition to RT2 is the first stop reel that is stopped first among the three reels, and the SP replay winning condition is the first stop reel that is stopped first among the three reels. And the second stop reel to be stopped next, the latter is notified in all navigation sections, and the former is notified in some navigation sections in some navigation sections, so even a low-skilled player is notified. The operation of stopping the reel can be performed in the above operation mode.

  In addition, a promotion lottery that determines whether or not to be promoted to all navigation sections or partial navigation sections by winning a role with a relatively low probability of winning such as watermelon or cherry in some navigation sections or no navigation sections. If it is selected and won, it will be promoted to the entire navigation section or partial navigation section, so the expectation that navigation stock can be acquired even if the entire navigation section or partial navigation section ends in RT3 is maintained Can be made.

  In addition, even if a special replay wins at RT3 and moves to RT2, it is possible to move to RT3 again by winning SP replay at RT2, so RT3 ends and shifts to RT2. However, it can give a sense of expectation that Navistock can be acquired.

  Even if RT4 is the most unfavorable gaming state for the player and does not shift directly to RT3, it shifts to RT1 when the promoted replay wins in RT4, and further special replay is performed in RT1. Since winning makes a transition to RT2, which may shift directly to RT3, RT4 can also make a transition to RT3 and have a sense of expectation for acquiring navigation stock.

  In the present embodiment, when the AT target combination is won, the stop mode changes according to the stop order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. However, as the AT target combination, the stop switches 8L, 8C, The stop mode may be changed in accordance with both the operation timing of 8R (so-called eye-pressing timing) and the operation timing and stop order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. As an operation mode that is advantageous to the player when the AT target combination is won, an effect of notifying the timing of the stop operation or both the timing of the stop operation and the pressing order may be performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, SP replay to which one or more navigation stocks are given is applied as an advantageous display result advantageous to the player, but at least a display result advantageous to the player may be used. Display results with a high probability of winning Navistock or a high average value of the number of winning Navistock, and a display result of whether or not to shift to a state advantageous to the player, such as the lottery mode lottery described above May be applied.

  In the present embodiment, the normal gaming state is the gaming state that is the most unfavorable for the player, and RT4 that does not directly shift to RT3, that is, RT1 moves to RT1 when the promotion replay wins in this RT4. In RT1, it is a configuration that shifts to RT2 that may shift directly to RT3 when a special replay wins, but at least a configuration that does not shift to RT2 that can shift directly to RT3 from RT4 as a normal gaming state The configuration may be such that the transition from RT4 to RT2 can be performed directly. Even in such a configuration, the transition to RT2 may be performed directly when RT4 transition conditions are satisfied in the RT4. Since it will shift, RT4 will also move to RT3 and have a sense of expectation to acquire Navistock Rukoto can.

  Next, game history information generated in the slot machine 1 will be described. In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 91a gives an experience value on the condition that a predetermined achievement condition is satisfied when a password (key data) described later is input by the player at the start of the game, Each time 10 experience points are acquired, the level is added. Each time the level value exceeds a certain value, the number of types of effects that may be executed is increased. More specifically, it includes an effect table 1 used for levels 1 to 30, an effect table 2 used for levels 31 to 60, and an effect table 3 used for levels 61 to 99. In addition to the effect patterns registered in the effect table 1, effect patterns that are not registered in the effect table 1 are defined, and the effect table 3 includes the effect patterns registered in the effect tables 1 and 2. An effect pattern that is not registered in the effect tables 1 and 2 is defined, and the level exceeds 30 by selecting an effect pattern using the effect table corresponding to the current level among the effect tables 1 to 3. In this case, when the number exceeds 60, the production pattern increases.

  The experience value is stored in the experience value storage area assigned to the RAM 91b.

  The sub CPU 91a increases the items that can be selected as the effect setting every time the level value exceeds a certain value. More specifically, the frequency of production (production setting 1), main character (production setting 2), character costume (production setting 3), production background design (production setting 4), BGM ( The production setting 5) can be selected, and in these production settings, it is possible to select from 3 types until the level exceeds 30, and when the level exceeds 30, it becomes possible to select from 5 types and exceeds the level 60 And 8 types can be selected.

  As an achievement condition to which an experience value is given, for example, as shown in FIG. 27, a continuous production showing the possibility of winning a special role is executed, and if the special role is won or missed, a bonus confirmation screen is displayed. The case where it is displayed is determined, the difficulty level of each achievement condition, the current level, the experience value given according to the number of games since the game was started is determined, and when the achievement condition is established Experience values according to the situation will be given.

  The continuous effect B shown in FIG. 27 is an effect indicating that the possibility of winning the special role is higher than the continuous effect A, that is, an effect in which the ratio selected at the time of winning the special role is higher than the continuous effect A. It is an effect whose appearance rate is lower than that of the continuous effect A.

  And when the continuous production A is executed and the special role is not won, and when the continuous production B is executed and the special role is not won, the latter has more experience values. Even if there is a high possibility that a special role has been won, more experience points will be given if the special role is not won .

  Moreover, when the continuous production A is executed and the special role is not won, and when the continuous production A is executed and the special role is won, the latter has more experience points. Even if the possibility of winning a special role is low, more experience points will be given if a special role is won. .

  Moreover, even when the same achievement condition is satisfied, the experience value given by 0 to 499G, 500 to 699G, and 700G or more is different, so that as the number of games increases, more experience value is given. It has become.

  Further, every time the value of the level exceeds a certain value, the experience value to be given decreases, and the experience value to be given decreases. Specifically, when the level 30 is exceeded, and when the level 60 is exceeded, the experience value that is given respectively decreases, and the experience value is not given depending on the achievement condition. For this reason, every time the level exceeds a certain value, it becomes difficult to further increase the level.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, an experience value is given when an achievement condition corresponding to the result of playing a game is established, and the level increases according to the experience value, and the production pattern increases. The setting items for the production increase, and the player's willingness to play the game can be effectively enhanced.

  In addition, conditions other than the conditions shown in FIG. 27 are prepared in advance as the achievement conditions, and include, for example, conditions for obtaining a result of achievement of a specific mission.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 91a determines that a predetermined condition is established in the game when a player inputs a password (to be described later) or selects “easy start” at the start of the game. , Coins (three types of gold, silver, and copper), which are exchange values when receiving a predetermined privilege from the management server 1200, are awarded to the player. The privilege includes, for example, content data such as music, wallpaper, a standby screen, or data (for example, a two-dimensional code) indicating a voucher that can be exchanged for a predetermined article.

  This coin acquisition specification is shown in FIG. For example, when a bonus (which may be either BB or RB) is won, one coin of gold, silver and bronze is awarded with a probability of 50%. In addition, at the time of cherry acquisition (specifically, at the time of winning), one coin of gold, silver and bronze is awarded with a probability of 100%. Also, every time 200 games are consumed, one of gold, silver, and copper coins is awarded with a probability of 100%. However, as the number of games increases, the probability of giving a good-colored coin (copper → gold or silver, silver → gold) is increased.

  Also, when a mission is completed, coins are awarded with a probability of 100% according to the level of the achieved mission. For example, when a high level mission is achieved, one gold, one silver and one copper coin is awarded. In addition, when a mission in the level is completed, any two coins of gold, silver, and copper are awarded, and when a mission of a low level is achieved, any one of the coins of gold, silver, and copper is awarded. Is done. In addition to the acquisition of coins between such games, as will be described in detail later, when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the end of the game, coins are awarded to the player.

  Further, when the mission of high level and medium is achieved, a coin to be given is added on condition that there is a stock coin described later. In this case, for example, when a mission of a high level is achieved, any two of gold, silver, and copper coins are added, and when a mission during the level is achieved, any of gold, silver, and copper coins is given. One additional card is added.

  When a coin is awarded to the player, the acquired data (data indicating the number of acquired gold, silver and bronze coins) stored in the acquired coin area allocated to the RAM 91b is updated according to the content of the coin. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, there is an effect that is executed on condition that the level is a certain level or more, the cumulative number of games, the cumulative number of bonuses, etc. is a certain number or more. Such as a level above a certain level, a cumulative game number or a cumulative bonus number, etc., a mission that is achieved by performing an effect that does not appear unless it is a certain number or more is defined. The willingness to raise can also be increased effectively.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a sequentially advances the stages of the story displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in accordance with the number of games in the game when a password described later is input at the start of the game. Specifically, depending on the number of games, when the story reaches a certain stage, the next stage is developed.

  Further, the value of the level can take over not only the value increased in one slot machine 1 but also the value increased in other slot machines 1. Further, not only the level value but also the stage of the story developed in the other slot machine 1 or when the player changes the production setting in the other slot machine 1, the setting contents can be taken over.

  Specifically, the player selects “password input” from the main menu screen shown in FIG. 29A and inputs a password issued in advance by the management server 1200, thereby responding to the previous game history. It is possible to play the game by taking over the level and production setting (including the stage of the story).

  The password (key data) will be described in detail later. Specific data, radar chart information, level, model information, latest information, other information according to the player's individual game history managed by the management server 1200 described later, This is character data consisting of eight characters that can specify the effect setting.

  The main menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 when the effect switch 56 (CHANCE button) is operated in the control state from the end of the game (after the setting change) until the bet amount is set. Is done.

  In the state where the main menu screen is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B, the stop switch 8L is operated to move to the menu item on the left side, and the stop switch 8R is operated. To move to the right menu item. Then, when the effect switch 56 is operated, the menu item displayed in front is selected. Further, when the effect switch 56 is operated in a state where “End” is displayed in front as a menu item, or when the stop switch 8C is operated for a predetermined time or longer, as shown in FIG. An end confirmation screen in which “YES” and “NO” can be selected is displayed. By operating the stop switches 8L and 8R and the effect switch 56 on this end confirmation screen and selecting “YES” from “YES” and “NO”, the basic screen (normal before moving to the main menu screen) Screen). In addition, the screen returns to the basic screen when no operation is continued for a predetermined time for each screen.

  On the main menu screen before entering the password or before starting the game by the simple start described later, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), "easy start", "password entry", "member registration", "stock coin hint" , "End" menu item is displayed.

  In the main menu screen in this case, the player operates the stop switches 8L and 8R and the effect switch 56 to select “stock coin hints”, so that the player is shown in FIGS. Such a stock coin hint screen can be displayed. The stock coins are coins (three types of gold, silver, and copper) that are added and accumulated when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the game in the slot machine 1 regardless of whether or not a password is input. Data indicating stock coins (stock coin data) is stored in a stock coin storage area allocated to the RAM 91b.

  The stock specification of this stock coin is shown in FIG. For example, if a bonus (which may be either BB or RB) is won, one of gold, silver and bronze coins is stocked with a probability of 100%. Further, every time 100 games are consumed, one of gold, silver, and copper coins is stocked with a probability of 20%.

  When a new coin is stocked, the stock coin data stored in the stock coin storage area allocated to the RAM 91b is updated according to the content of the coin.

  When the “stock coin hint” is selected by the player, the sub CPU 91a refers to the stock coin data stored in the stock coin storage area, and according to the state of the accumulated coin ( One of the hint screens shown in a) to (d) is selected and displayed. In this case, for example, when the screen (a) is displayed in FIG. 30, it is suggested that the value of the accumulated coin is not high, and when the screen (d) is displayed, the coin is accumulated. This suggests that the value of the coin is very high (for example, the number of gold coins is a predetermined number or more).

  The stock coin is given to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the end of the game. Therefore, by displaying the screen that serves as a hint of stock coins in this way, the player can predict how much stock coins are accumulated before entering the password, and there are more stock coins This makes it possible to select the game machines that have been accumulated, and to improve the interest.

  The stock coin data is reset at a predetermined timing. In the present embodiment, the slot machine 1 is reset when the power is turned on and when a predetermined time (for example, 20 hours) has elapsed since the power was turned on. In the resetting, the stock coin storage area is cleared, and the value content is different (that is, the combination of gold, silver, and copper is different). And the determined stock coin data is stored in the stock coin storage area.

  When the player selects “stock coin hint” within a predetermined time (for example, one hour) after the above resetting, the sub CPU 91a determines the value of the stock coin data stored in the stock coin storage area. Regardless of the content, one predetermined screen among the screens shown in FIGS. 30A to 30D is displayed. By doing in this way, it becomes difficult for a player to determine whether or not stock coin data has been reset, and it is possible to improve interest.

  Next, password input operation specifications will be described. When the player selects the password menu by operating the stop switches 8L and 8R and the effect switch 56 on the main menu screen before inputting the password or before starting the game by a simple start described later, the sub CPU 91a causes the sub CPU 91a to select the password menu. The password input screen shown in (b) is displayed. On the password input screen, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), the characters are moved by operating the stop switches 8L and 8R, and as shown in FIG. 32 (a), the effect switch 56 (CHANCE button) is pressed. By operating, the character displayed in front is selected.

  Here, every time one character is selected, the next character can be selected. Further, by operating the effect switch 56 in a state where “return one character” is displayed in the foreground, it is possible to select the foreground character again. Then, when an 8-character password is selected, the process moves to “OK”, and as shown in FIG. 32B, the effect switch 56 is operated in a state where characters other than “return one character” are displayed in front. This completes the password entry.

  If the entered password is authenticated as a legitimate password, as shown in FIG. 32C, a “password OK” screen indicating that the password has been accepted is displayed. The password OK screen is closed by operating the effect switch 56 or when a predetermined time has elapsed, and is switched to the basic screen. If the password is not authenticated as a legitimate password, a “password NG” screen (not shown) indicating that password input has not been accepted is displayed. The password NG screen is also closed by operating the effect switch 56 or when a predetermined time has elapsed, and is switched to the basic screen.

  If the password is authenticated as a regular password, the values of the personal history storage area (total number of games, number of BBs, number of RBs, achievement mission history) assigned to the RAM 91b are initialized and analyzed from the password. Model data for identifying the model analyzed from the password in the level storage area allocated to the RAM 91b, the level analyzed from the password in the specific data storage area allocated to the RAM 91b. The latest information indicating the latest game history analyzed from the password is stored in the model information storage area allocated to the RAM 91b, and the other effect settings 1 to 3 analyzed from the password are stored in the latest information storage area allocated to the RAM 91b. The effect setting storage area assigned to the RAM 91b is set. With the above settings, the level and production settings according to the previous game history are taken over by the slot machine 1. At this time, the input password itself is stored in a password storage area assigned to the RAM 91b.

  Next, a procedure for analyzing the input password will be described. As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the ROM 91c previously stores a password analysis table in which numerical values of 0 to 31 are determined in correspondence with characters constituting the password (32 types of Roman letters: 26 types and 6 types of symbols). It is remembered. As shown in FIG. 34 (b), the sub CPU 91a refers to the password analysis table and replaces the input password with a corresponding numerical value. For example, if the password is “DVUHJFUI” as shown in FIG. 34B, the password is changed to “3-21-20-7-9-5-20-8” according to the password analysis table shown in FIG. Replaced.

  Next, the replaced numerical value is converted into a binary number, and a total of 5 bits of the lower 6th bit, lower 13th, lower 20th, lower 27th, and lower 34th are random values (when the management server 1200 issues a password) Random value acquired in the range of 0 to 31), and a 35-bit value excluding the random value is shifted rightward by the random value. For example, as shown in FIG. 34B, if the random value is 0011 (= 3), the 35-bit value excluding the random value is shifted rightward by 3 bits. At this time, the value overflowed in the right direction is shifted to the upper bits.

  Next, the 35-bit value after each shift is converted according to the bit shuffle table. As shown in FIG. 35, the bit shuffle table is converted after every 0 to 34 bits constituting the value obtained by removing the random value from the values converted from the password into binary numbers corresponding to the random values of 0 to 31. Is a table in which the positions of the bits are determined, and conversion is performed by moving the value of the corresponding bit to the position of the bit specified in the row corresponding to the random value. For example, if the random value is 0011 (= 3), the value of the lower 0 bit moves to the lower 18 bits, and the value of the lower 1 bit moves to the lower 11 bits.

  Next, the specific data, level, story stage, radar chart information, and effect setting are analyzed from the 35-bit value obtained by the conversion by the bit shuffle table. Details of the specific data and radar chart information will be described later.

  Of the 35-bit value, the lower 5 bits indicate a hash value (a random number assigned to the management server 1200 to make the passwords vary), the lower 6 to 8 bits indicate specific data, and the lower 9 bits. To the lower 16 bits indicate the level, the lower 17 bits to the lower 21 bits indicate the stage of the story, the lower 22 bits to the lower 29 bits indicate the radar chart information, and the bits higher than the lower 30 bits are set to produce 6 bits are assigned, and the specific data, level, story stage, and production settings specified from these values are the specific data storage area, level storage area, story storage area, and production setting storage, respectively. It will be set to the area.

  Further, as described above, the personal history storage area is allocated to the RAM 91b, and a game history (total number of games, number of BBs, number of RBs) after the password is input and authenticated as a regular password is accumulated. It has become so. Further, when a mission (issue) set in advance in the slot machine 1 is achieved, a history of achievement missions indicating the types of missions achieved is also accumulated. Further, as described above, with respect to the experience value, every time 10 experience values are acquired, the level stored in the level storage area is increased by one.

  When the player finishes the game, the player's game history, current level, experience value, number of acquired coins, production settings (model information and latest information are not included), achievement mission history, A two-dimensional code including information (game history information) including 6-choice SP replay information, which will be described later, is output from the slot machine 1 and acquired using the mobile terminal 1100, and a game history included in the two-dimensional code The information can be reflected in the contents of a player database described later included in the management server 1200.

  Note that if “Easy Start” is selected on the main menu screen by the player, unlike the case of entering the password, the player cannot take over the previous game history, but the player Game history, current level, experience value, earned coins, production settings (excluding model information and latest information), achievement mission history, 6-choice SP replay after selecting "Easy Start" A two-dimensional code including information and the like can be output from the slot machine 1.

  Further, when the non-display setting included in the analyzed radar chart information is OFF, when a password is input on the main menu screen, the radar chart confirmation screen after the password input shown in FIG. 33A is displayed on the liquid crystal display. 51 is displayed in the display area. Note that on / off of the non-display setting of the radar chart confirmation screen is set in advance in the portable terminal 1100 owned by the player.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33A, a regular hexagonal radar chart displaying six items in five stages is displayed on the radar chart confirmation screen after the password is entered. The six items on the radar chart correspond to the pressing order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specifically, in the clockwise direction from the top, the “A (123)” item for “left middle right”, the “B (132)” item for “middle left and right”, and the “C (213)” item for “middle left and right” , “D (231)” item of “middle right and left”, “E (312)” item of “middle right and left”, and “F (321)” item of “middle right and left”. The five-stage display pattern of the radar chart includes a first pattern that uses only the first and fifth stages, and a second pattern that uses only the second to fourth stages. Specifically, in the first pattern, when the maximum value of each ratio of all items is 75% or more, the size of the item is displayed in the fifth row, and the sizes of the remaining five items are all one row. Each pattern is displayed in the eye. Further, in the second pattern, when the maximum value of each ratio of all items is less than 75%, the size of each item having a ratio range of 0% to 13% is displayed in the second row. The size of each item that is% to 44% is displayed in the third row, and the size of each item that is 45% to 74% is displayed in the fourth row.

  In addition, on the radar chart, a data graph of the “six-selection SP replay establishment ratio” data of the slot machine 1 and a data graph of the “push order selection rate” data of the player are displayed. . Here, the data of “six selection SP replay establishment ratio” is data indicating a breakdown (%) of the past 100 times that the replay GRs 31 to 36 counted in the slot machine 1 are internally won. Specifically, the ratio (number of times) of the replay GR 31 displayed in the “A (123)” item, the ratio of the replay GR 32 displayed in the “B (132)” item, and the “C (213)” item The ratio of the replay GR 33 displayed, the ratio of the replay GR 34 displayed in the “D (231)” item, the ratio of the replay GR 35 displayed in the “E (312)” item, and the “F (123)” item This is data indicating the ratio of the replay GR 35 displayed on the screen. That is, the data of “six-choice SP replay establishment ratio” is data indicating a breakdown (%) of the past 100 times of correct repressing order of SP replay in the slot machine 1.

The “pushing order selection rate” data is the selection rate (%) of the past 100 times of the pushing order selected when the player is internally won by the replay GR 31 to 36 as well as the slot machine 1. This is the data shown.
Therefore, the radar chart confirmation screen after entering the password displays the data graph of “six selection SP replay establishment ratio” and the data graph of “push order selection ratio” in an overlapping manner, so that the slot machine 1 It is possible to visually compare the tendency of the correct answer push order of SP replay and the tendency (押 し) of the player push order.

  For example, in the radar chart confirmation screen after the password input shown in FIG. 33A, the graph of the data of “6 option SP replay establishment ratio” includes the items “A (123)”, “B (132)”, “ "F (321)" item is the second row (for example, 5%, 5%, 4%), "C (213)" item, and "D (231)" item is the third row (for example, 25%, 16%) ), The item “E (312)” is the fourth row (for example, 45%). On the other hand, in the graph of the “push order selection rate” data, the “A (123)” item is the fifth row (for example, 80%) and the remaining items are the first row (for example, all 4%). is there. Therefore, the player can recognize that the compatibility with the slot machine 1 is not good because the overlapping portions are small by comparing the graphs.

Note that the data of “six-choice SP replay establishment ratio” is generated based on “correct answer pressing order history” data stored in an SP replay history storage area described later. The “history of correct answer pressing order” data is data that can identify the history of the past 100 times in the correct pressing order (“A (123)” to “F (321)”) at the time of internal winning of the replays GR31 to 36. It is. For example, data that can identify “C (213)” one time before (previous), “F (321)” two times ago (previous time),..., 100 times before is “B (132)”.
The “push order selection rate” data is data included in the analyzed radar chart information, and is identification value data for displaying a graph in the first pattern or the second pattern.

  In the present embodiment, the radar chart confirmation screen after the password is entered displays only the data graph of “six selection SP replay establishment ratio” and the data of “push order selection ratio” data. Not limited, for example, a graph of data of “6 choice SP replay correct answer rate” that is a correct answer rate when the player selects the push order without navigation, or when the push order is selected in a part of the navigation state A graph or the like of the data of the “2-choice SP replay accuracy rate” that is the accuracy rate may be used.

When “easy start” is selected on the main menu screen, the radar chart confirmation screen after the simple start shown in FIG. 33B is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51.
In this embodiment, the radar chart confirmation screen after a simple start is shown in FIG. 33 (b), with the data of the “push order selection rate” data from the radar chart confirmation screen after password entry shown in FIG. 33 (a). This is a screen with the graph omitted.
Therefore, in the radar chart confirmation screen after the easy start, the player cannot visually recognize the compatibility with the slot machine 1 as in the radar chart confirmation screen after entering the password, but at least the correct answer of the SP replay of the slot machine 1 The tendency of order is recognizable.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), on the main menu screen after the password is entered or after the game is started by simple start, “Data clear”, “Create two-dimensional code”, “Today's result”, “End” Menu items are displayed. For example, when “DATA CLEAR” is selected by the player on the main menu screen in this case, a password storage area, a personal history storage area, an experience value storage area, a specific data storage area, Each of the SP replay history storage area (excluding “correct answer push history” data), the level storage area, the model information storage area, the latest information storage area, the effect setting storage area, and the acquired coin storage area is cleared.

  Further, when “today's result” is selected by the player on the main menu screen shown in FIG. 29 (b), the game history from the start of the game after the password input or simple start to the present time, the current The level, experience value, acquired coin contents, achievement mission history, 6-option SP replay information, and the like are displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 37 (a), when the player selects “2D code creation” on the main menu screen, the sub CPU 91a generates a 2D code, and FIG. As shown, the generated two-dimensional code is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In the two-dimensional code displayed here, for example, in the case of a game for which a password is entered, as shown in FIG. 38C, a URL (normal update URL) indicating the location of the normal update page on the management server 1200 is displayed. ), A password entered at the start of the game, a game random number (32-bit random number in the present embodiment) that is a random value acquired each time a two-dimensional code is created, game history update data, acquired data, , Respectively, is included. Here, the game history update data and the acquired data constitute game history information.

  The game history update data includes data values stored in the personal history storage area (total number of games, total number of medals paid out, number of BBs, number of RBs, number of consecutive winning bonuses (number of consecutive resorts), History, history of executed premium effects), level values stored in the level storage area, experience values stored in the experience value storage area, effects settings 1-3 stored in the effect setting storage area, SP Stores 6-choice SP replay information based on data stored in the replay history storage area.

Here, in the SP replay history storage area, data such as “history of correct push order”, “history of selected push order”, “history of navigation state”, and the like are stored as SP replay history information. The “selection push order history” data refers to the past 100 times of the push order (“A (123)” to “F (321)”) selected by the player at the time of internal winning of the replays GR31 to 36. It is data that can identify the history. For example, data that can identify “D (231)” in the previous (previous), “E (312)” in the previous (previous),..., And “D (231)” in the previous 100 times. The “navigation state history” data includes the navigation state at the time of internal winning of the replays GR 31 to 36, that is, “none” in the no-navigation section, “two-choice navigation” in some navigation sections, This is data that can identify the history of the last 100 “All Navigation”. For example, data that can identify “none” in the previous (previous), “2 choice navigation” in the previous (previous),...
The data of the SP replay history information is updated as needed by the sub CPU 91a every time the replay GR 31 to 36 is internally won.

  Further, the 6-option SP replay information included in the game history update data is generated based on the SP replay history information after the password is input or after the “easy start” is selected. Specifically, the 6-option SP replay information is the number of internal winnings (established number) of each of the replays GR31 to 36, that is, “6-choice SP replay establishment number in correct push order 123” to “6-choice SP in correct push order 321”. “Number of replays established”, “Selective push order 123 during 6-choice SP replay” to “Selective push order 321 during 6-choice SP replay”, which is the player's selective push order at the time of internal winning of the replay GR 31 to 36, each replay GR 31- 36 SP replay winning numbers (the number of correct answers) "6 choice SP replay correct number of correct push order 123" to "6 choice SP replay correct number of correct push order 321", replay GR31 when executing partial navigation The number of established 36 and the number of correct answers include “2 choice SP replay establishment number”, “2 choice SP replay establishment number”, and the like.

  Further, the acquired data has the same contents as the acquired data (data indicating the number of acquired coins of gold, silver and copper) stored in the acquired coin storage area.

  Here, in the two-dimensional code, the total number of games (0 to 9999 games) is 14 bits, the number of BBs (0 to 127) is 7 bits, the number of RBs (0 to 63) is 6 bits, level The value (0 to 199) is 8 bits, the experience value (0 to 999) is 10 bits, and the production settings 1 to 3 (respectively 0 to 99) are 7 bits (total 7 × 3 = 21 bits), 100 bits are used for the types of missions achieved (100 types). Therefore, a total of 166 bits are used for the game history update data.

  On the other hand, 4 bits (4 × 3 = 12 bits in total) are used for the acquired data (the number of gold coins, the number of silver coins, and the number of copper coins (0 to 15 respectively)). 12 bits are used for.

  In this way, the acquisition data used for granting a privilege such as an item can be handled only by the data amount of information related to the granting of the game, unlike the game history update data used for outputting the game history. The proportion occupied can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the experience value stored in the experience value storage area is the remaining fractional experience value (that is, 0 to 9) used for level-up.

  Then, the two-dimensional code is read by the portable terminal 1100 and accessed to the URL of the management server 1200 specified from the two-dimensional code, so that the content specified from the two-dimensional code is the content of the player database included in the management server 1200. To be reflected.

  In the output of the two-dimensional code, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), the case where the two-dimensional code is output without production, and the acquisition of stock coins as shown in FIG. 39 when a predetermined condition is satisfied. There is a case where it is output along with a JACKPOT effect indicating a lottery effect. Details of the JACKPOT effect will be described later.

  Note that the input of a new password is prohibited until the two-dimensional code is displayed after the password is authenticated. When the two-dimensional code is displayed and the screen is switched to the basic screen by operating the effect switch 56, the password storage area, personal history storage area, experience value storage area, specific data storage area, 6 options assigned to the RAM 91b are selected. Each of the SP replay information storage area, the level storage area, the model information storage area, the latest information storage area, the effect setting storage area, and the acquired coin storage area is cleared, and the password input is permitted again.

  Thus, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the past game history is reflected (taken over) by inputting the password when starting the game, such as the level and the effect setting when the previous game was played. An effect can be executed, and an effect with continuity can be performed for a long period of time. In addition, since the password is included in the two-dimensional code including the game history information after the game ends, the password is issued by authenticating the password included in the two-dimensional code at the management server 1200 that issues the password. It is possible to determine whether or not the player is a received player. Therefore, even if a third party obtains another person's password and plays a game to acquire a two-dimensional code, or acquires another person's two-dimensional code, the game history information included in the two-dimensional code is managed. It cannot be reflected in a player database, which will be described later, included in the server 1200. As a result, it is meaningless even if the password or two-dimensional code is diverted or stolen, so that the diversion or theft of the password and the two-dimensional code can be prevented.

  As will be described in detail later, the password issued by the management server 1200 changes depending on a random value that changes every time it is issued, so the same password is used even when the same game history is specified. It's not easy to guess the password.

  In the present embodiment, in order to receive a password issued from the management server 1200, the mobile server 1100 is used to access the management server 1200 in advance, perform membership registration, and terminal identification information (SIM data) of the mobile terminal 1100. ) Must be registered. In the present embodiment, when “member registration” is selected on the main menu screen shown in FIG. 29A by the player, the sub CPU 91a specifies the URL indicating the location of the member registration page of the management server 1200. A two-dimensional code (see FIG. 38A) is generated and displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. The player can easily access the member registration page of the management server 1200 by reading the two-dimensional code with the portable terminal 1100.

  FIG. 60A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the display unit 140 when the mobile terminal 1100 is reading a two-dimensional code. As described above, the image of the two-dimensional code is displayed in the portable terminal 1100 in a state where the photographed two-dimensional code is displayed within a frame in the display screen while being focused by autofocus. Is taken in. Then, the read two-dimensional code is analyzed by a general two-dimensional code reading application program included in the mobile terminal 1100.

  FIG. 60B is a diagram illustrating a state in which a URL as a two-dimensional code analysis result is displayed on the display unit 140 of the mobile terminal 1100. As described above, the URL indicating the location of a predetermined web page such as the member registration page of the management server 1200 is displayed on the display unit 140. Then, by selecting this URL, it is possible to access a predetermined web page of the management server 1200 indicated by this URL.

  In the present embodiment, even if the player has not registered as a member by accessing the management server 1200 in advance, the game history is accumulated by selecting the “easy start” described above on the main menu screen. The game using the function to play can be started. However, in this case, of course, it is not possible to play a game by taking over the previous game history.

  After the game is started by selecting “Easy Start”, the two-dimensional code displayed when the game is ended is different from the case where the password is entered and started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60B, instead of the normal update URL, a URL indicating the location of the easy start page on the management server (easy start update URL) is included. The password is not included. Other information is the same as the two-dimensional code based on the game in which the password is input.

  Then, the player reads this two-dimensional code with the portable terminal 1100 and accesses the URL of the management server 1200 specified from the read two-dimensional code. The management server 1200 determines whether the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the accessed mobile terminal has already been registered. When the terminal identification information of the accessed mobile terminal is not registered, the management server 1200 stores player information (details will be described later) for the player associated with the terminal identification information. Newly registered in the database, the game history information included in the two-dimensional code output from the slot machine 1 is reflected in the added player information.

  On the other hand, when the terminal identification information of the accessed mobile terminal has already been registered, the management server 1200 is included in the player information associated with the terminal identification information in the player database in the two-dimensional code. Reflect game history information.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, regardless of whether or not a member has been registered, the player can select a “simple start” on the main menu screen and accumulate a game history. A game using can be started.

  After displaying the various menu screens that shift from the main menu screen as described above, the sub CPU 91a of the present embodiment switches to the basic screen when a predetermined time has elapsed if no operation is performed by the player. It is like that.

  In addition, when the player inputs a password or “Easy Start” is selected, the sub CPU 91a produces an effect different from the effect mode (normal effect mode) when these operations are not performed. The control state is changed to the specific effect mode which is a mode.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 36, a specific effect area 51a, 51b is assigned to a part of the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. In the normal effect mode, as shown in FIG. Only regular patterns are displayed in the specific effect areas 51a and 51b.

  On the other hand, when controlled to the specific effect mode, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), characters based on the effect setting set by the player are displayed in the specific effect area 51a. In 51b, an experience value meter indicating the level value (level value specified from the password) of the player and the experience value required until the next level rise is displayed. The target displayed in the specific effect areas 51a and 51b in the specific effect mode is not limited to the above, and for example, the achievement status of the mission may be displayed.

  However, in the specific effect mode by selecting “Easy Start”, the effect setting, the level value, etc. cannot be specified. Therefore, in the specific effect area 51a, there is a character based on the default effect setting instead of the effect setting set by the player. Even in the specific effect area 51b, the level value and the experience value meter are displayed based on the default value (for example, 0 for the level value and 0 level for the experience value meter).

  Further, regardless of whether in the normal effect mode or the specific effect mode, the sub CPU 91a deletes the specific effect areas 51a and 51b when the stop switch 8C is operated for a predetermined time or more while the basic screen is displayed. In the default setting, the specific effect areas 51a and 51b are displayed, and a game start operation (input of a password or selection of “easy start”) according to the present system or a game When an end operation (selection of “data clear” or “two-dimensional code creation”) is performed, even if the specific effect areas 51a and 51b have been erased so far, the specific effect areas 51a and 51b are displayed again. The

  In the present embodiment, the display mode in the areas other than the specific effect areas 51a and 51b is the same in the specific effect mode and the normal effect mode, and the same effect is performed. For example, an effect of raining in the background is performed regardless of the effect mode, which suggests the result of the internal lottery.

  As described above, the display modes in the areas other than the specific effect areas 51a and 51b are the same, but in the specific effect mode, for example, the display contents of the specific effect areas 51a and 51b are displayed in accordance with the winning expectation degree of the special role. It is also possible to produce effects that change.

  As described above, since the display modes of the areas other than the specific effect areas 51a and 51b can be shared between the specific effect mode and the normal effect mode, it is possible to reduce the volume of image data and moving image data to be used.

  Note that the game history displayed in the specific effect area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 is not limited to the level value and experience value as described above, but the accumulated game number, accumulated bonus number, and the above-described effect execution conditions. The level value, the accumulated game number, the remaining value up to the accumulated bonus number, and the like may be displayed.

  Next, the management server 1200 to which the management apparatus of the present invention is applied will be described. As described above, the management server 1200 is configured to include hardware equivalent to a general server computer, and can perform data communication with the mobile terminal 1100 via the Internet network 900. The management server 1200 performs registration and update of game information corresponding to the player, issuance of a password, provision of a privilege, and the like according to the access request content from the mobile terminal 1100. In this embodiment, the management server 1200 can be accessed only from a mobile terminal to which terminal identification information (SIM data) is assigned, and a mobile terminal or terminal identification information to which no terminal identification information is assigned. Is granted, but access from a portable terminal that refuses to transmit terminal identification information is denied.

  The management server 1200 includes a player database for managing game information of the player, a game history database for managing a history of game results for each game of the player, and privilege data given to the player. A privilege database for managing information. The management server 1200 also includes a registration URL database (registration URL DB) for managing the URL (see FIG. 60B) of each update request received when updating the game information as registered information, and the game information. And an invalid URL database (invalid URL DB) for managing the URL of each update request received as invalid information.

  In the player database, as shown in FIG. 40 (a), terminal identification information (SIM data) that can identify the portable terminal 1100 owned by the player, current status (standby / game), password (last ), Total number of games to date, total number of BBs, total number of RBs, current level, experience value (of fractions), earned coins (number of gold, silver and bronze coins), points, Points, setting contents of production settings 1 to 3, achievement status by mission (1 for missions that have been achieved, 0 for missions that have not yet been achieved), 6-option SP replay information (“6-option SP replay in correct order 123) Number "-" Number of 6-option SP replays established in correct push order 321 "," Selected push order 123 in 6-select SP replay "-" Selected push order 321 in 6-select SP replay "," 6 choice SP in correct push order 123 " Replay positive The player information consisting of “number” to “the number of 6-choice SP replays in the correct push order 321”, “the number of 2-choice SP replays established”, “the number of 2-choice SP replays”, etc.) is classified by player (terminal identification). Registered by information). In addition to this, the player information includes the player name (registered name), gender, date of birth, personal information (member information) of the player such as prefectures, although not shown. .

  In the game history database, as shown in FIG. 40B, terminal identification information (SIM data) that can identify the portable terminal 1100 owned by the player who played the game, the game date and time, the slot machine 1 at the start of the game , The game random number randomly acquired by the slot machine 1 at the end of the game, the number of games in the game, the number of BBs in the game, the number of RBs in the game, the end of the game Level value at the time, experience value at the end of the game (number of fractions), number of gold, silver and copper coins acquired in the game, setting contents of the effect settings 1 to 3 at the end of the game, The game history information including the achievement status by mission in the game is registered.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (c), the privilege database stores privilege data (content data or a two-dimensional code indicating a replacement ticket or an application ticket) corresponding to a privilege ID that can identify the privilege. Privilege data information including the type of privilege data, the type of condition for granting a privilege, the condition value of the corresponding type, and the like is registered. As the type of condition, coins, points, points (details will be described later), level, mission achievement rate, number of games, number of BBs, number of RBs, etc. can be set. And the number of points, the number of points, the number of points, etc.) can be set.

  Next, returning to the slot machine 1, the contents of each process executed in response to an operation via the main menu screen of the player will be described in detail.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main menu display processing executed in the slot machine 1. This process is started when the player operates the effect switch 56 on the basic screen. First, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the current gaming state is a state from the end of the game (after the setting change) until the bet amount is set (step S2201). When it is determined that the state is not in this state (step S2201; NO), the sub CPU 91a returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the state is between the end of the game and the time when the bet number is set (step S2201; YES), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the current control state is the specific effect mode. (Step S2202).

  When it is not the specific effect mode, that is, in the normal effect mode (step S2202; NO), the sub CPU 91a displays the main menu screen before the password input (before the “easy start” selection) as shown in FIG. The display control circuit 92 is controlled to display on the display 51. As a result, the main menu screen before password entry is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 (step S2203). Thereafter, the sub CPU 91a returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  On the other hand, if it is the specific effect mode (step S2202; YES), the sub CPU 91a displays the main menu screen on the liquid crystal display 51 after the password input (after selecting “Easy Start”) as shown in FIG. The display control circuit 92 is controlled to do so. Thereby, the main menu screen after the password is input is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 (step S2204). Thereafter, the sub CPU 91a returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main menu operation process before password input executed in the slot machine 1. This process is started when a player performs an operation of selecting any menu item on the main menu screen (see FIG. 29A) before inputting a password (or before selecting “Easy Start”). .

  When the “stock coin hint” is selected by the player (step S2301; YES), the sub CPU 91a refers to the stock coin data stored in the stock coin storage area and corresponds to the state of the accumulated coin. Then, any one of the hint screens shown in FIGS. 30A to 30D is selected and displayed (step S2302). However, as described above, when a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) has not elapsed since the resetting of stock coin data, regardless of the value content of the stock coin data, (a) to (a) in FIG. A predetermined screen (for example, the screen shown in FIG. 30C) of the hint screens shown in d) is displayed. Thereby, the player can predict how much stock coins are accumulated in the slot machine 1. If the effect switch 56 is operated while the hint screen is displayed, the screen returns to the main menu screen. If the state where no operation is continued for a predetermined time during the display of the hint screen, the screen returns to the basic screen.

  Alternatively, when “member registration” is selected by the player (step S2303; YES), the sub CPU 91a determines a URL indicating the location of the member registration page of the management server 1200 (FIG. 38A). Reference) is generated and displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 (step S2304). The player operates the mobile terminal 1100 to cause the displayed two-dimensional code to be captured and to be taken into the mobile terminal 1100 (store the two-dimensional code image in the storage unit 120 (see FIG. 2)). it can. If the effect switch 56 is operated during the display of the two-dimensional code or if no operation is continued for a predetermined time, the screen returns to the basic screen.

  Alternatively, when the “simple start” is selected by the player (step S2305; YES), the sub CPU 91a displays the radar chart confirmation screen after the simple start selection shown in FIG. 33 (b) on the liquid crystal display 51. After that (step S2306), the main menu screen is closed, the basic screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the control state is changed from the normal effect mode to the specific effect mode (step S2308). Further, the sub CPU 91a displays a character based on the default effect setting in the specific effect area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51, and displays a level value and an experience value meter based on the default value in the specific effect area 51b ( For example, 0 for a level value, 0 level for an empirical value meter).

  Alternatively, if “password input” is selected by the player (step S2309; YES), the sub CPU 91a executes a password input acceptance process (step S2310).

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the password input acceptance process. First, the sub CPU 91a controls the display control circuit 92 to display a password input screen on the liquid crystal display 51. As a result, a password input screen (see FIG. 31B) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 (step S2401).

  The player operates the stop switches 8L and 8R and the effect switch 56 while viewing the password issued from the management server 1200, which is displayed on the display screen of the mobile terminal 1100 (see FIG. 60F). Enter the password on the password entry screen.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), when the player performs a password determination operation on the password input screen (step S2402; YES), the sub CPU 91a performs the above-described operation (see FIG. 34). ), The input password is analyzed (step S2403).

  As a result of the analysis, if the input password is not a regular password (step S2404; NO), the sub CPU 91a displays the above-described password NG screen (not shown) indicating that the password input has not been accepted, on the liquid crystal display. 51 is displayed (step S2405). During the display of the password NG screen, when the effect switch 56 is operated or a predetermined time elapses, the screen is switched to the basic screen.

  On the other hand, when the input password is a regular password (step S2404; YES), an effect mode change process is performed (step S2406).

  When executing the effect mode changing process, the sub CPU 91a specifies the day of the week based on the date / time data acquired from the RTC 97 (step S2501). Further, the sub CPU 91a specifies the content and value of the synchronous update data from the specified day of the week and the specific data extracted from the input password based on the synchronous update data specification table shown in FIG. 45 stored in the ROM 91c. (Step S2502).

Here, the synchronous update data is data generated by the management server 1200 and is updated by the management server 1200 and the slot machine 1 in synchronization.
In this embodiment, the management server 1200 and the slot machine 1 to which the password is input update synchronous update data in synchronization based on the synchronous update data specification table shown in FIG. Specifically, the management server 1200 can generate synchronous update data based on the synchronous update data specification table stored in the storage unit 220, and can specify the generated synchronous update data in response to a player's request. Issue a password containing specific data. Further, the slot machine 1 specifies the content and value of the synchronous update data corresponding to the input password specific data based on the synchronous update data specification table stored in the ROM 91c, and uses the value as the content of the synchronous update data. Each time it is stored in the specific data storage area. As a result, the management server 1200 and the slot machine 1 to which the password is input can update the synchronous update data in synchronization.

  Here, the synchronous update data specification table will be described. As shown in FIG. 45, the synchronous update data specification table is a table for specifying the contents and values of the synchronous update data. In the synchronous update data specification table of this embodiment, the synchronous update data having different contents generated for each day of the week and the correspondence between the actual numerical values of the contents are set.

  Specifically, “Mission clear count”, which is the total number of mission clears of all players registered as members, is set as the Sunday content of the synchronous update data. Further, as the contents of Monday, “number of members” which is the total number of all registered players is set. Further, as the contents of Tuesday, “the maximum number of balls to be played” which is the maximum value of the number of payouts for one day among all the players registered as members is set. In addition, as the contents of Wednesday, “maximum number of consecutive resorts” that is the maximum value of the number of consecutive bonus winnings among all players registered as members is set. Further, as the contents of Thursday, “the number of premier effects performed” which is the total number of times of premier effects performed by all players registered as members is set. Further, as the contents of Friday, “server access number” which is the total number of accesses to the management server 1200 of all players registered as members is set. Furthermore, as the contents of Saturday, “mini game execution count”, which is the total number of times that all players registered as members have executed a game application (see FIG. 60) described later, is set.

In this embodiment, the “number of mission clears”, “maximum number of balls”, “maximum number of consecutive resorts”, and “number of premiere effects” are the games of all players managed in each database shown in FIG. Generated based on information. That is, these synchronous update data are based on game history update data (achieved mission history, total medal payout number, bonus consecutive winning count, history of executed premier effects) included in the two-dimensional code output by the slot machine 1. Generated.
On the other hand, the “number of members”, “number of server accesses”, and “number of mini game executions” are stored and managed in the storage unit 220 by the management server 1200 independently of the slot machine 1. That is, these synchronous update data are generated as independent data managed independently from the slot machine 1.

Also, as the value of “number of mission clears”, eight values (A0 to A7) that satisfy the relationship of A0>A1>...> A7 are set. Further, eight values (B0 to B7) that satisfy the relationship of B0>B1>...> B7 are set as the value of “number of members”. Further, eight values (C0 to C7) that satisfy the relationship of C0>C1>...> C7 are set as the “maximum number of balls”. Further, eight values (D0 to D7) satisfying the relationship of D0>D1>. Also, eight values (E0 to E7) that satisfy the relationship of E0>E1>. Further, eight values (F0 to F7) that satisfy the relationship of F0>F1>...> F7 are set as the value of “number of server accesses”. Further, eight values (G0 to G7) that satisfy the relationship of G0>G1>.
The values A0 to A1, B0 to B7,..., G0 to G7 can be set to arbitrary values. For example, A0 is “9999 or less”, A1 is “10,000 to 29999”, A2 May be “30,000 or more and 49999 or less”, and A7 may be “1 million or more”.

Further, the eight values of each content of the synchronous update data can be converted into a value of specific data of 3 bits. For example, the values of A0 to A7 of “number of mission clears” can be the values of “000” to “111” of the specific data. In this case, if a password including the converted specific data (for example, “010”) is input on Sunday, the slot machine 1 can specify the value of the “number of mission clears” (for example, A2).
Furthermore, in the specific data storage area of the present embodiment, the value of specific data is stored for each content of the synchronous update data (“mission clear count”, “number of members”,..., “Mini game execution count”). . For example, the value of “Mission Clear” is “001 (A1)”, the value of “Number of Members” is “010 (B2)”,..., And the value of “Number of Mini-Games” is “001 (G1)” It is stored in a state distinguished from each other.

  Further, after specifying the synchronous update data, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the value of the specific data extracted from the password is a value that can be normally updated (step S2503). Specifically, the synchronous update data compares the values of specific data with the same content, and determines whether the value of the extracted specific data is greater than or equal to the value of the specific data stored in the specific data storage area To do. For example, among the values of the specific data stored in the specific data storage area, the “number of members” is “010 (B2)”, and the value of the specific data extracted on Tuesday is “010 (B2)” or “011”. If (B3) ", it is determined that the value can be updated normally, and if" 001 (B1) "or" 000 (B0) ", it is determined that the value cannot be updated normally.

  When it is determined that the value cannot be updated normally (step S2503; NO), the sub CPU 91a ends the process, and when it is determined that the value can be updated normally (step S2503; YES), the sub CPU 91a determines the value. The production mode is changed based on the data (step S2504). Specifically, the sub CPU 91a switches to the setting of the production pattern and selection rate of each effect set according to each value (A0 to A7, B0 to B7,..., G0 to G7) of the specific data.

  In the present embodiment, by performing an effect that the value of the synchronous update data is updated in a demonstration effect that is executed when the player is not playing a game, and adding a premier effect that can be executed according to the value. Change the production mode. For example, if the value of the stored specific data is “000” and the value of the specific data extracted is “001”, the content of the synchronous update data is “Mission clear count” on Sunday, Executes an effect such as “The number of missions achieved exceeds ○! Premiere production △ is open!” Etc., and the setting to change the percentage of Premiere production selected during the game from 0 to 5% Do. Since the demonstration effect is changed, the change in the effect mode can be recognized even when the player is not playing a game, so that he is interested in playing with the slot machine 1 whose effect mode has been changed. The operation of the slot machine 1 can be improved.

  Then, after the effect mode is changed, the sub CPU 91a updates the value of the synchronous update data stored in the specific data storage area to the extracted specific data value (step S2505), and ends the process.

  Returning to FIG. 43, after the effect mode changing process, the sub CPU 91a is different when the model information included in the password indicates a model different from the slot machine 1 (step S2407; YES). The liquid crystal display 51 is controlled to perform an effect of displaying that it is a model (step S2408), and the process ends. As a result, as shown in FIG. 46, an effect screen in which the character speaks that a password of a different model has been input is displayed in the specific effect area 51 a of the liquid crystal display 51.

  The effect screen is switched to the basic screen in the normal effect mode (see FIG. 36A) when a predetermined time has elapsed. That is, when a password of a different model is input, the input of the password is accepted, but the game cannot be started using the function of storing the game history without shifting to the specific effect mode.

  On the other hand, if it is not a different model (step S2407; NO), the sub CPU 91a displays a password OK screen (see FIG. 32C) on the liquid crystal display 51 (step S2409). When the password OK screen is displayed, the effect switch 56 is operated or when the predetermined time elapses, the screen is switched to the basic screen.

  When switching from the password OK screen to the basic screen, the sub CPU 91a sets a level, an effect setting, and the like based on the password analysis result (step S2410). The sub CPU 91a stores the input password in a password storage area assigned to the RAM 91b. It should be noted that the setting of the level and the effect setting and the transition to the specific effect mode may be performed at the timing when the password OK screen is displayed.

  With the above settings, the level and production settings corresponding to the previous game history are taken over by the slot machine 1. Further, by shifting to the specific effect mode, the player can start a game using a function for accumulating a game history.

  After setting the level, the effect setting, etc., the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the non-display setting included in the radar chart information analyzed from the password is on (step S2411). When it is determined that the non-display setting is off (step S2411; NO), the radar chart confirmation screen after the password input shown in FIG. 33A is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 (step S2412). The control state is changed from the normal effect mode to the specific effect mode (step S2413). If it is determined that the non-display setting is ON (step S2411; YES), the control state is changed from the normal effect mode to the specific effect mode without displaying the radar chart confirmation screen (step S2413).

  Next, the sub CPU 91a checks a flag indicating whether or not one month or more has elapsed since the previous game, which is indicated by the third bit, in the latest information included in the password, and the flag is determined to be the previous game. It is determined whether or not “1” indicating that one month or more has elapsed since the first time (step S2414).

  As a result, when it is indicated that one month or more has elapsed since the previous game (step S2414; YES), the sub CPU 91a executes an effect indicating that (step S2416). For example, since a game has not been played recently, an effect screen in which the character speaks that he wants to play a number of times is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51.

  On the other hand, when it is not indicated that one month or more has elapsed since the previous game (step S2414; NO), the sub CPU 91a suggests the previous game according to the flag value derived by the password analysis. An effect (previous game suggestion effect) is executed (step S2415). More specifically, the sub CPU 91a uses a flag value indicating whether or not the previous number of games is 700 games or less indicated by the first bit of the latest information included in the password, or the second bit. The previous game suggestion effect is executed according to the value of the flag indicating whether or not the previous BB count is 10 or more. For example, the sub CPU 91a executes an effect by displaying such as “The bonus number was 10 or more before this time. It ’s amazing.” Or “I did n’t turn it much before. The liquid crystal display 51 is controlled.

  Returning to the main menu operation process before password input shown in FIG. 42, when “end” is selected by the player (step S2311; YES), the sub CPU 91a displays an end confirmation screen as shown in FIG. The data is displayed on the display 51 (step S2312). Here, when an operation of selecting “YES” is performed by the player or when a predetermined time elapses, the screen is switched to the basic screen. Alternatively, when an operation for selecting “NO” is performed by the player, the screen returns to the main menu screen (see FIG. 29A).

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of level / coin related processing executed in the slot machine 1. This process is executed for each game of the game. First, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the current control state is the specific effect mode (step S2601). As a result, when it is determined that the mode is not the specific effect mode (step S2601; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S2612.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the specific effect mode is set (step S2601; YES), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not a predetermined achievement condition such as the condition shown in FIG. 27 is satisfied (step S2602). As a result, when the achievement condition is not satisfied (step S2602; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S2607.

  On the other hand, when the achievement condition is satisfied (step S2602; YES), the sub CPU 91a updates the experience value and the history of the achievement mission according to the achievement condition (step S2603). The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the updated experience value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value corresponding to the level (in this embodiment, 10 experience values regardless of the level) (step S2604). As a result, when the experience value is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value (step S2604; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S2607.

  On the other hand, when the experience value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (step S2604; YES), the sub CPU 91a increases the level as much as possible (increases the level value) based on the experience value (step S2605). Then, the sub CPU 91a subtracts the value for the increased level from the experience value (step S2606). For example, when the level is increased by 2, 20 experience values (10 experience values × 2) are subtracted.

  In step S2607, the sub CPU 91a updates other game histories (total number of games, number of BBs, number of RBs, etc.). Next, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the above-described coin acquisition condition (see FIG. 28A) is satisfied (step S2608). As a result, when the acquisition condition is not satisfied (step S2608; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S2612.

  On the other hand, when the acquisition condition is satisfied (step S2608; YES), the sub CPU 91a executes a lottery process according to the satisfied condition as shown in FIG. 28A (step S2609). As a result of the lottery process, when the lottery is not won (step S2610; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S2612. On the other hand, when the lottery is won (step S2610; YES), the sub CPU 91a updates the acquired data stored in the acquired coin area allocated to the RAM 91b in accordance with the winning result (the type and number of coins) ( Step S2611).

  In addition, when the established acquisition condition is level high, medium mission achievement, and there is a stock coin (one type of coin is sufficient), as described above, additional coins are additionally given. The At that time, the sub CPU 91a subtracts the added coins from the stock coins. However, in the stock coin, if there are no additional coins of the same type as the added coins, the number of coins of that type in the stock coin is set to 0 (in the case of 0 originally, 0) It will remain as it is.)

  In step S2612, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not a stock condition (see FIG. 28B) for adding (stocking) stock coins is satisfied. As a result, when the stock condition is not satisfied (step S2612; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S2616. On the other hand, when the stock condition is satisfied (step S2612; YES), the sub CPU 91a executes a lottery process (stock lottery process) for stocking coins (step S2613).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the stock lottery process is executed on the condition that a bonus is won or 100 games are consumed (except for a game in a bonus state). In the example shown in FIG. 28 (b), the winning probability is set to 20% under the condition that 100 games are consumed, but the winning probability may be changed according to the current contents of stock coins. . For example, when the total number of coins in the stock coin is 15 or less, the winning probability may be higher than in the case of 16 or more.

  As a result of the stock lottery process, when the lottery is not won (step S2614; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S2616. On the other hand, when the lottery is won (step S2614; YES), the sub CPU 91a updates the stock coin data stored in the stock coin storage area allocated to the RAM 91b according to the winning result (the type and number of coins). (Step S2615).

  In step S2616, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 20 hours) has elapsed since the power of the slot machine 1 was turned on. As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed since the power was turned on (step S2616; NO), the sub CPU 91a returns the process to be executed to the caller process of the level coin related process.

  On the other hand, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on (step S2616; YES), the sub CPU 91a executes a lottery process (stock coin data reset lottery process) for resetting the stock coin data ( Step S2617). In this process, first, the stock coin storage area is cleared, and the value contents are different (that is, the combination of gold, silver, and copper is different). Determine coin data. The sub CPU 91a stores the determined stock coin data in the stock coin storage area (step S2618). Then, the sub CPU 91a returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of the level / coin related process.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main menu operation processing after password input executed in the slot machine 1. This process is started when a player performs an operation of selecting any of the menu items on the main menu screen (see FIG. 29B) after entering the password (or after selecting “Easy Start”). .

  When “today's result” is selected by the player (step S2701; YES), the sub CPU 91a indicates the contents of the player's game history and the like after the password input or after the start of the game by simple start until the present time. A screen (not shown) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 (step S2702). Specifically, the sub CPU 91a, from the personal history storage area, experience value storage area, level storage area, earned coin storage area, etc. assigned to the RAM 91b, game history, achievement mission history, experience value, level, acquisition Get data etc. Then, a screen showing the acquired data contents is generated and displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Alternatively, when “DATA CLEAR” is selected by the player (step S2703; YES), the sub CPU 91a changes the control state from the specific effect mode to the normal effect mode (step S2704), and after the password is input or simple start The game history and the like of the player from the start of the game to the current time are cleared (step S2705). Specifically, the sub CPU 91a assigns the password storage area, the personal history storage area, the experience value storage area, the specific data storage area, the level storage area, the model information storage area, the latest information storage area, and the effect setting assigned to the RAM 91b. Clear each of the storage area and the acquired coin storage area.

  Alternatively, when the “two-dimensional code creation” is selected by the player (step S2706; YES), the sub CPU 91a executes a two-dimensional code display process (step S2707).

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the two-dimensional code display process. First, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not a lottery condition (stock coin acquisition lottery condition) for acquiring stock coins is satisfied (step S2801). In this embodiment, after entering the password or selecting “Easy Start”, 1000 games (excluding games in bonus state) have been consumed, and three or more gold coins have been stocked, If any of these conditions is satisfied, it is determined that the stock coin acquisition lottery condition is satisfied.

  As a result, when the stock coin acquisition lottery condition is not satisfied (step S2801; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S2807. On the other hand, if the acquisition lottery condition for stock coins is satisfied (step S2801; YES), the sub CPU 91a sets the stock acquisition lottery flag to ON (step S2802) and at the present time after inputting the password or selecting "Easy start". The medal difference number up to is calculated (step S2803). The medal difference number is obtained by subtracting the total number of medals inserted by the player from the total number of medals acquired by the player during the game period.

  After calculating the medal difference number, the sub CPU 91a executes a stock acquisition lottery process (step S2804). In the present embodiment, in this lottery process, when the medal difference number is negative, the winning probability is higher than when it is positive.

  As a result of the stock acquisition lottery process, when the lottery is not won (step S2805; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be executed to the process of step S2807. On the other hand, when the lottery is won (step S2805; YES), the sub CPU 91a updates the acquired data stored in the acquired coin area allocated to the RAM 91b according to the winning result (the type and number of coins) ( Step S2806). In the present embodiment, the specification is such that all of the stock coins can be acquired by winning in the stock acquisition lottery process. Therefore, when the lottery is won, the sub CPU 91a updates the stock coin data stored in the stock coin storage area so that the number of coins of gold, silver and copper becomes zero.

  In step S2807, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the game in the specific effect mode is due to the selection of “easy start”. As a result, if the game is a simple start game (step S2807; YES), the sub CPU 91a generates a two-dimensional code (see FIG. 38B) corresponding to the simple start game (step S2808).

  On the other hand, if the game is not a game with a simple start, that is, a game with a password input (step S2807; NO), the sub CPU 91a generates a two-dimensional code (see FIG. 38C) corresponding to the game with a password input. (Step S2809).

  If the stock lottery flag is ON (step S2810; YES), the sub CPU 91a turns off the stock acquisition lottery flag (step S2811). Further, the sub CPU 91a causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display the stock coin acquisition lottery effect screen and the generated two-dimensional code (step S2812). Specifically, the sub CPU 91a displays a JACKPOT effect screen on the liquid crystal display 51 as shown in FIG. If the lottery is not won in the previous stock acquisition lottery process, the sub CPU 91a displays a JACKPOT effect screen indicating that the stock coin could not be acquired as shown in FIG. The generated two-dimensional code synthesized screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. On the other hand, when the lottery is won, the JACKPOT effect screen indicating that the stock coin has been acquired and the generated two-dimensional code composition screen as shown in FIG. To display.

  On the other hand, if the stock lottery flag is not ON (step S2810; NO), the sub CPU 91a causes the generated two-dimensional code to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in a normal manner without any effects as shown in FIG. (Step S2813).

  Regardless of whether or not there is an effect, if the effect switch 56 is operated during the display of the two-dimensional code or if no operation is continued for a predetermined time, the screen returns to the basic screen. At that time, the sub CPU 91a changes the control state from the specific effect mode to the normal effect mode (step S2814). Further, the sub CPU 91a clears the game history and the like of the player after the password input or after the game start by simple start until the current time (step S2815). Specifically, the sub CPU 91a assigns the password storage area, the personal history storage area, the experience value storage area, the specific data storage area, the level storage area, the model information storage area, the latest information storage area, and the effect setting assigned to the RAM 91b. Clear storage area and earned coin storage area.

  After the password input shown in FIG. 48, the process returns to the main menu operation process, and when “end” is selected by the player (step S2708; YES), the sub CPU 91a displays an end confirmation screen as shown in FIG. The data is displayed on the display 51 (step S2709). Here, when an operation of selecting “YES” is performed by the player or when a predetermined time elapses, the screen is switched to the basic screen. Alternatively, when the player performs an operation of selecting “NO”, the screen returns to the main menu screen (see FIG. 29B).

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a procedure of game history output processing at the time of credit settlement. First, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the settlement switch 10 has been operated by the player by determining whether or not a settlement detection command has been received (step S2751). If the payment detection command has not been received (step S2751; NO), the process of step S2751 is repeated. When the settlement detection command is received (step S2751; YES), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the current control state is the specific effect mode (step S2752). If it is not the specific effect mode, that is, if it is the normal effect mode (step S2752; NO), the sub CPU 91a returns to step S2751, and if it is the specific effect mode (step S2752; YES), a two-dimensional code is displayed. The sound of a special notification message (for example, a message such as “Ping Pong! Don't forget to collect game history data!”) Is output from the speakers 53 and 54 (step S2753). . Then, after outputting the special notification message, the sub CPU 91a executes the two-dimensional code display process shown in FIG. 50 (step S2754) and ends the process.

  Next, the contents of each process executed by the management server 1200 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a procedure of server main processing executed by the management server 1200. This server main process is executed whenever there is an access request from the mobile terminal 1100 to each web page managed by the management server 1200. In response to this access request, the control unit 210 of the management server 1200 executes the following processes.

  When there is a request for access to the web page for member registration from the portable terminal 1100 (step S2901; YES), the control unit 210 executes member registration processing (step S2902).

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the procedure of this member registration processing, and FIG. 61 is a diagram showing data exchange between the portable terminal 1100 and the management server 1200 regarding this processing. The control unit 210 determines whether or not the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the portable terminal 1100 that has transmitted the member registration request is already registered in the player database (step S3001). When the terminal identification information is already registered in the player database (step S3001; YES), the control unit 210 transmits member information (for example, a player name (registered name) transmitted from the portable terminal 1100 in response to the player's operation. ), Gender, date of birth, personal information of prefectures, etc.) are reflected in the player information corresponding to the terminal identification information (step S3002). Thus, for example, if the player has been updated at a simple start described later, but has not yet registered the member information, only the member information can be added or registered. Member information can be changed.

  On the other hand, when the terminal identification information has not been registered in the player database (step S3001; NO), the control unit 210 newly registers the player information corresponding to the player (the terminal identification information) in the player database ( Step S3003). In the player information in this case, only the terminal identification information and member information transmitted from the portable terminal 1100 according to the player's operation are stored. Then, the control unit 210 notifies the registration result to the portable terminal 1100 that has made the member registration request (step S3004). Upon receiving the registration result, the portable terminal 1100 displays the registration result and notifies the player to that effect.

  Returning to the server main process shown in FIG. 51, when there is a request for access to a web page for simple start update (easy start update request) from the mobile terminal 1100 (step S2903; YES), the control unit 210 performs a simple start. Update processing is executed (step S2904). In this embodiment, when there is a simple start update request (step S2903; YES), the control unit 210 acquires the reception date and time of the simple start update request and stores it in the storage unit 220.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of this simple start update process, and FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the exchange of data between the slot machine 1 and the portable terminal 1100 and between the portable terminal 1100 and the management server 1200 regarding this process. is there. The control unit 210 determines whether or not the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the portable terminal 1100 that is the transmission source of the simple start update request is already registered in the player database (step S3101). When the terminal identification information is not already registered in the player database (step S3101; NO), the control unit 210 newly registers the game history information corresponding to the player (the terminal identification information) in the player database (step S3101; NO). S3102). Then, control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to the process of step S3110.

  On the other hand, when the terminal identification information has already been registered in the player database (step S3101; YES), the control unit 210 determines whether or not the same URL as the update request is registered in the unauthorized URL DB. Determination is made (step S3103). As a result, when the same URL is registered in the illegal URL DB (step S3103; YES), the control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to the process of step S3117.

  On the other hand, when the same URL is registered in the unauthorized URL DB (step S3103; NO), the control unit 210 determines whether or not the same URL as the update request is registered in the registered URL DB. Determination is made (step S3104). As a result, when the same URL is registered in the registration URL DB (step S3104; YES), the control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to the process of step S3117.

  On the other hand, when the same URL is registered in the registration URL DB (step S3104; NO), the control unit 210 includes each parameter (game random number, game history update data, acquired data) included in the URL of the update request. In order to acquire the URL, a URL decoding process is executed on the URL of the update request (step S3105). Then, the control unit 210 determines whether or not each of the decoded parameters has a value within a predetermined range (a value between a preset minimum value and a maximum value) (step S3106). As a result, when any of the parameters does not have a value within the predetermined range (step S3106; NO), the control unit advances the process to be performed to the process of step S3117.

On the other hand, when each parameter has a value within the predetermined range (step S3106; YES), the control unit 210 last receives from the reception date and time of the simple start update request from the portable terminal 1100 that last updated the player database. The time until the reception date and time of the update request is acquired (step S3107). Then, the control unit 210 determines whether or not the total number of games (specific game history) included in the game history update data is a value that cannot be obtained within the acquired time (step S3108). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the time per game, which is a value obtained by dividing the acquired time [seconds] by the total number of games, is less than a preset setting value [seconds / game]. Note that the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is designed so that the shortest time per game is 4.1 [seconds / game], so 4.1 [seconds / game] is set as the setting value. ing. In this embodiment, since the shortest time per game is 4.1 [seconds / game], 60 / 4.1≈14.63 [times / minute] per minute is the limit value. For this reason, for example, in the case of 16 games or more per minute, 60/16 = 3.75 [seconds / game], which is less than 4.1 [seconds / game]. ).
As a result, when the total number of games is an impossible value (step S3108; YES), the control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to the process of step S3117.

  On the other hand, when the total number of games is a possible value (step S3108; NO), the control unit 210 has the same game random number specified from the update request as the game history corresponding to the terminal identification information in the game history database. It is determined whether it is stored in the information (step S3109). As a result, when the same game random number is stored in the game history information (step S3109; YES), it is very likely that the update request is the same two-dimensional code as that used for the previous update request. For this reason, the control part 210 advances the process to perform to the process of step S3117.

  On the other hand, when the same game random number is not stored in the game history information (step S3109; NO), the control unit 210, based on the game history update data, acquired data, and the like received from the mobile terminal 1100, the player The contents of the player information corresponding to the player in the database are updated, and the game history information is additionally registered in the game history database (step S3110). Also, the status of the player information is updated during standby. In the player information update process here, the level and the experience value are not updated, but are updated by the level / experience value update process described below.

  Next, the control unit 210 executes level / experience value update processing (step S3111). FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the level / experience value update process.

  The control unit 210 updates the level included in the player information corresponding to the player (terminal identification information) to the level included in the received game history update data (step S3301). Further, the control unit 210 adds the experience value included in the received game history update data to the experience value included in the player information (step S3302). As a result of this addition, the control unit 210 determines whether or not the experience value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value corresponding to the level (in this embodiment, 10 experience values regardless of the level) (step S3303). As a result, when the experience value is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value (step S3303; NO), the control unit 210 advances the process to be performed to the process of step S3306.

  On the other hand, when the experience value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (step S3303; YES), the control unit 210 increases the level by one (increases the level value by one) (step S3304). Then, the control unit 210 subtracts a value corresponding to one level up (here, 10 experience values) from the experience value (step S3305). As described above, the level and the experience value included in the player information are updated.

  In step S3306, the control unit 210 executes a lottery process for giving points. As with the earned coins, the points are exchange values when receiving a privilege. When the lottery process is not won (step S3307; NO), the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of calling this process.

  On the other hand, when winning (step S3307; YES), the control unit 210 determines whether or not the points (details will be described later) included in the player information corresponding to the player are 1000 points or more. (Step S3308).

  As a result, when the score is not 1000 points or more (step S3308; NO), the control unit 210 uses the player information corresponding to the player as a point corresponding to the total number of games included in the received game history update data. (Step S3309). For example, 1/10 of the total number of games is added. In this case, if the total number of games is 1000, 1000 × 1/10 = 100 points are added. Then, the control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to the process of step S3311.

  On the other hand, when the score is 1000 points or more (step S3308; YES), the control unit 210 corresponds to the player twice the number of points according to the total number of games included in the received game history update data. It adds to the point contained in player information (step S3310). For example, 2 times of 1/10 of the total number of games is added. In this case, if the total number of games is 1000 games, 1000 × 1/10 × 2 = 200 points are added.

  The control unit 210 clears the points included in the player information corresponding to the player (step S3311). Then, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  Returning to the simple start update process shown in FIG. 53, in step S3112 the control unit 210 registers the URL of the update request in the registration URL DB (step S3112). Then, the control unit 210 transmits to the portable terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information that the game history has been updated (step S3113). Next, the control unit 210 determines whether or not the simple start update request from the mobile terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information has been transmitted five times or more in total (step S3114).

  As a result, when it has not been transmitted five times or more (step S3114; NO), the control unit 210 advances the process to be performed to the process of step S3116. On the other hand, if it has been transmitted five times or more (step S3114; YES), the control unit 210 receives the password issuance and recommends that a password be recommended to be played in the mobile phone indicated by the terminal identification information. It transmits to the terminal 1100 (step S3115).

  Next, the control unit 210 executes history display processing (step S3116). The history display process is a process for displaying the game history of the player on the portable terminal 1100 based on the player information corresponding to the player. Thereby, for example, the number of games, the number of BBs, the number of RBs, and the number of games accumulated so far, the number of BBs, the number of RBs, and the like are displayed on the display unit 140 of the mobile terminal 1100. In the history display process, a digest of the current game may be displayed. Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

In step 3117, the control unit 210 determines whether or not the URL of the update request is registered in the unauthorized URL DB (step S3117). As a result, when the URL of the update request is registered in the illegal URL DB (step S3117; YES), the control unit 210 indicates that the game history or the like cannot be updated by the terminal identification information. It transmits to the portable terminal 1100 (step S3119). Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.
On the other hand, if the URL of the update request is not registered in the unauthorized URL DB (step S3117; NO), the URL of the update request is registered in the unauthorized URL DB (step S3118), and the process of step S3119 is executed. . Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  Returning to the server main process shown in FIG. 51, when there is an access request (normal update request) to the normal update web page from the mobile terminal 1100 (step S2905; YES), the control unit 210 performs the normal update process. It executes (step S2906). In the present embodiment, when there is a normal update request (step S2903; YES), the control unit 210 acquires the reception date and time of the normal update request and stores the same as when the simple start update request is received. 220.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the procedure of this normal update processing, and FIG. 62 is a diagram showing data exchange between the slot machine 1 and the portable terminal 1100 and between the portable terminal 1100 and the management server 1200 regarding this processing. . The control unit 210 determines whether or not the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the mobile terminal 1100 that is the transmission source of the normal update request is already registered in the player database (step S3201). When the terminal identification information has not been registered in the player database (step S3201; NO), the control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to the process of step S3214.

  On the other hand, when the terminal identification information has been registered in the player database (step S3201; YES), the control unit 210 determines whether or not the same URL as the update request is registered in the unauthorized URL DB. Determination is made (step S3202). As a result, when the same URL is registered in the illegal URL DB (step S3202; YES), the control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to the process of step S3214.

  On the other hand, when the same URL is registered in the illegal URL DB (step S3202; NO), the control unit 210 determines whether the same URL as the update request is registered in the registration URL DB. Determination is made (step S3203). As a result, when the same URL is registered in the registration URL DB (step S3203; YES), the control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to the process of step S3214.

  On the other hand, when the same URL is registered in the registration URL DB (step S3203; NO), the control unit 210 obtains each parameter (password, game random number, game history update data, acquisition) included in the URL of the update request. In order to acquire (data), a URL decoding process is executed on the URL of the update request (step S3204). Then, the control unit 210 determines whether or not each decoded parameter has a value within a predetermined range (step S3205). As a result, when any of the parameters does not have a value within the predetermined range (step S3205; NO), the control unit advances the process to be performed to the process of step S3214.

  On the other hand, when each parameter has a value within a predetermined range (step S3205; YES), the control unit 210 determines the player information corresponding to the password specified from the update request and the terminal identification information in the player database. It is determined whether or not the password stored in the password matches (step S3206). As a result, when the passwords match (step S3206; YES), the control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to the process of step S3204.

  On the other hand, if the passwords do not match (step S3206; NO), the control unit 210 determines whether there is a mismatch of only one character, which is the difference between the front and rear characters on the layout when the password is input (step S3206). S3207). The difference between the front and rear characters on the layout at the time of password input is the front and rear characters of the password input screen shown in FIG. 32B. For example, if one character included in the regular password is “Z”, “Y” and “=” correspond to one character before and after that. As a result, when there is no mismatch of two characters or more, or when there is no difference of one character before and after (step S3207; NO), the control unit 210 advances the process to be executed to the process of step S3214.

  On the other hand, if it is a mismatch of only one character and is different by one character before and after (step S3207; YES), it is authenticated as a player who has been issued a password, assuming that an input error condition is satisfied, and the controller 210 Advances the process to be executed to the process of step S3208.

  Next, the control unit 210 determines whether or not the same password or game random number specified from the update request is stored in the game history information corresponding to the terminal identification information in the game history database (step S210). S3208). As a result, if the same password or game random number is stored in the game history information (step S3208; YES), it is very likely that the update request is the same two-dimensional code as that used for the previous update request. high. For this reason, the control part 210 advances the process to perform to the process of step S3214.

  On the other hand, when neither the same password nor the game random number is stored in the game history information (step S3208; NO), the control unit 210 is based on the game history update data, acquired data, etc. received from the mobile terminal 1100. Then, the content of the player information corresponding to the player in the player database is updated, and the game history information is additionally registered in the game history database (step S3209). Also, the status of the player information is updated during standby. In the player information update process here, the level and experience value are not updated, but are updated in the following level / experience value update process.

  Next, the control unit 210 executes level / experience value update processing (step S3210). The contents of the level / experience value update processing are as described above (see FIG. 55).

  Next, the control unit 210 registers the URL of the update request in the registration URL DB (step S3211). Then, the control unit 210 transmits a message indicating that the game history has been updated to the mobile terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information (step S3212). Then, the control unit 210 executes history display processing (step S3213). The contents of this history display process are the same as the process of step S3116 in FIG. Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

In step 3214, the control unit 210 determines whether the URL of the update request is registered in the unauthorized URL DB (step S3214). As a result, when the URL of the update request is registered in the unauthorized URL DB (step S3214; YES), the control unit 210 indicates that the game history or the like cannot be updated by the terminal identification information. It transmits to the portable terminal 1100 (step S3216). Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.
On the other hand, if the URL of the update request is not registered in the unauthorized URL DB (step S3214; NO), the URL of the update request is registered in the unauthorized URL DB (step S3216), and the process of step S3216 is executed. . Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  In the above normal update process, in the update of the player information when the password is a mismatch of only one character and is different by one character before and after (step S3207; YES), the received game history update data, Rather than updating all applicable items based on the acquired data, etc., among them, the total number of games, the total number of BBs, the total number of RBs, achievement mission that can appear at the level stored in the player information Only the items that do not affect the continuity of the game history, such as the type of game, are updated, and the continuity of the game history is affected, such as the level, production settings, and types of achievement missions that do not appear at the level stored in the player information. The item and the acquired coins may not be updated. At that time, in the notification of update completion, the password was not completely matched but was in the range of input error, so only some items that did not affect continuity were updated. You may make it notify. In this way, the player has made a mistake in entering the password, but can recognize that the game history has been updated successfully, and identify the cause of any game history that has not been updated. It becomes possible.

  In addition, the input error condition is an arbitrary design item, and both the password registered in the management server 1200 and the password included in the update request are similar, and it is estimated that there is a high possibility of an input error. Anything can be used. For example, it may be determined that the input error condition is satisfied only when both passwords are different by only one character, and the input error condition is satisfied if there is a difference of one character before and after two characters. It may be determined that Also, if the characters that are different in both passwords are characters that are likely to be mistaken, such as “O” and “0”, or those that are assumed to be highly similar, such as the difference between uppercase and lowercase letters, You may determine with satisfy | filling the conditions of a mistake.

  Returning to the server main process shown in FIG. 51, when there is a request for access to the web page for the menu screen from the portable terminal 1100, that is, when there is a menu data acquisition request (step S2907; YES), the controller 210 Determines whether the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the portable terminal 1100 that is the transmission source of the request is already registered in the player database (step S2908). As a result, when the terminal identification information is not already registered in the player database (step S2908; NO), the control unit 210 informs the mobile terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information that the menu data cannot be acquired. Transmit (step S2911). Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  On the other hand, when the terminal identification information is already registered in the player database (step S2908; YES), the control unit 210 transmits the menu data to the portable terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information (step S2909). Thereby, a menu screen as shown in FIG. 60D is displayed on the display unit 140 of the mobile terminal 1100. On this menu screen, a menu of items that can be provided to the player at the site managed by the management server 1200 is displayed. Specifically, custom settings such as password issuance, history display, achievement mission display, earned coin number display, radar chart confirmation screen non-display, game execution, avatar settings, purchase of content etc. in the shop, Each link for browsing and posting the bulletin board is displayed. When a desired link is selected by the player, control unit 210 executes a menu selection receiving process (step S2910).

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the menu selection acceptance process. When the player selects a password issuance link (step S3401; YES), the controller 210 executes password issuance processing (step S3602).

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the password issuing process. The control unit 210 determines whether or not the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the portable terminal 1100 that is the transmission source of the request is already registered in the player database (step S3501). As a result, when the terminal identification information has not been registered in the player database (step S3501; NO), the control unit 210 transmits information that the password cannot be issued to the mobile terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information. (Step S3502). Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  On the other hand, when the terminal identification information has already been registered in the player database (step S3501; YES), the control unit 210 determines the level, model information, and the like based on the player information and game history information corresponding to the player. Acquire information such as the latest information, specific data, and other effects settings, and generate a password based on the acquired information according to the procedure reverse to the procedure described with reference to FIG. The generated password is transmitted to portable terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information (step S3503).

  The control unit 210 stores the generated password in the player information corresponding to the player as the previously issued password, and updates the status during the game (step S3504). Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  FIG. 60F is a diagram illustrating an example of a password display screen displayed on the display unit 140 of the mobile terminal 1100 when the password issuance link is selected. The player can input a password to the slot machine 1 while looking at the password display screen.

  In the management server 1200 according to the present embodiment, when a password issuance request is accepted, even if the status of the corresponding player information is in game, issuance of a password is not prohibited. Even when a new password issuance request is received, a new password is issued. Therefore, even if a password is issued but no game is played, a game is played but a 2D code is not acquired, or a 2D code is acquired but no update request is made A new password can be issued without access to release the password.

  Returning to the menu selection accepting process shown in FIG. 56, when the player selects a link for the number of acquired coins (step S3403; YES), the control unit 210 has player information corresponding to the player in the player database. , The number of gold, silver, and copper coins currently acquired by the player is acquired, and screen data indicating the result is transmitted to the portable terminal 1100 (step S3404). As a result, a screen showing the contents of the currently acquired coin as shown in FIG. 60 (H) is displayed on the display unit 140 of the portable terminal 1100.

  Alternatively, when the game execution link is selected by the player (step S3405; YES), the control unit 210 executes a game providing process (step S3406).

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game providing process. The control unit 210 transmits a game application (in this embodiment, a slot machine game) to the mobile terminal 1100 (step S3601). Thereby, the player can execute the slot machine game as shown in FIG. 60I on the portable terminal 1100. In this slot machine game, the same symbol is aligned in the horizontal direction or the diagonal direction, so that the points are increased according to the symbol. In addition, when the execution of the game application is ended by the player, the score acquired by the player is transmitted to the management server 1200 as the execution result.

  When the game application execution result, i.e., the score is not received (step S <b> 3602; NO), the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process. On the other hand, when a score is received (step S3602; YES), the control unit 210 updates and registers the received score in the player information corresponding to the player in the player database.

  Further, the control unit 210 adds coins (gold, silver, bronze) corresponding to the received points to the acquired coins included in the player information (step S3604).

  Further, the control unit 210 adds a point corresponding to the received score to the point included in the player information (step S3605). Then, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  Returning to the menu selection receiving process shown in FIG. 56, when a shop link is selected by the player (step S3407; YES), the control unit 210 executes an item granting process (step S3408).

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of this item granting process, and FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the exchange of data between the portable terminal 1100 and the management server 1200 regarding this process. The control unit 210 determines whether or not the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the mobile terminal 1100 is already registered in the player database (step S3701). As a result, when the terminal identification information is not already registered in the player database (step S3701; NO), the control unit 210 transmits to the portable terminal 1100 that item assignment is impossible (step S3702). Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  On the other hand, when the terminal identification information has already been registered in the player database (step S3701; YES), the control unit 210 extracts earned coins and points from the player information corresponding to the player in the player database, Based on the privilege database (see FIG. 40C), items that can be given according to the extracted acquired coins and points are extracted (step S3703). Then, control unit 210 generates a list of extracted items, and transmits the generated item list to portable terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information (step S3704).

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 60G, a screen showing items that can be assigned is displayed on the display unit 140 of the mobile terminal 1100 that has made the item request. On this screen, the number of remaining gold coins, the remaining number of points, a link for selecting items that can be granted, the number of gold coins or points required for the grant, the menu screen of FIG. 60 (D) A link to leave the shop is displayed for transition.

  Here, the number of remaining gold coins is 12, the remaining number of points is 1234 points, one gold coin for the purchase of item A, along with a link for purchasing item A, or , 100 points are required and two gold coins are required to purchase item B along with a link to purchase item B.

  In the screen of FIG. 60G, when the player selects a link corresponding to a desired item type, data indicating the selected item type is transmitted to the management server 1200.

  When receiving the item type desired by the player from the portable terminal 1100 (step S3705; YES), the control unit 210 reads the item data indicated by the received item type from the storage location indicated by the privilege database, and It transmits to the terminal 1100 (step S3706).

  Thereby, the player can acquire content data or data such as a two-dimensional code indicating an exchange ticket or an application ticket.

  Returning to the menu selection receiving process shown in FIG. 56, when each other link is selected by the player (step S3409; YES), the control unit 210 executes a process according to the selected link (step S3409). S3410). For example, when a history display link is selected by the player, the control unit 210 transmits screen data for allowing the player to select a date to the portable terminal 1100. Thereby, a date selection screen as shown in FIG. 60 (E) is displayed on the display unit 140 of the portable terminal 1100. On this date selection screen, a link of date choices of game history information corresponding to the player in the game history database is displayed. When one of the links is selected by the player, the control unit 210 performs the game based on the game history information on the date corresponding to the selected link and the player information corresponding to the player. The game history of the person is extracted and transmitted to the portable terminal 1100. Thereby, a history display screen as shown in FIG. 60C is displayed on the display unit 140 of the portable terminal 1100.

  As described above, according to the gaming system 1001 of the present embodiment, in the game using the function of accumulating the game history in the slot machine 1, the difference in the number of medals becomes negative, resulting in a disadvantageous game result for the player. When the game is finished, the probability of acquiring stock coins is set to be higher. Therefore, even if the player loses the game, the player can actively output the two-dimensional code and maintain the willingness to receive a privilege from the management server 1200. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which the player leaves without outputting the two-dimensional code after the game is finished, and as a result, it can be expected to promote utilization of services provided by the gaming system 1001.

  Note that the determination of whether the game result is advantageous or unfavorable for the player is based on the difference in the number of medals, but the determination criterion is an arbitrary design item. For example, 0 sheets may be used as a reference, or a negative number or a positive number may be used as a reference. In addition, the probability of acquiring stock coins is not limited to two cases, which are advantageous and disadvantageous, and may be changed in a plurality of stages depending on the degree of advantage and the degree of disadvantage. For example, when the difference number of medals is −1001 or less, the probability is the highest, and thereafter −1000 to −500, −500 to 0, 0 to 500, 500 to 1000, 1001 or more, and so on. The probability may be lowered every time the medal difference number increases.

  In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a stock coin acquisition lottery condition is satisfied at the end of a game using a game history accumulation function, a stock coin acquisition lottery effect (JACKPOT effect) is executed. For this reason, a player's gambling feeling is enshrined, and interest can be improved.

  Even if the stock coin acquisition lottery condition is not satisfied, the JACKPOT effect may be executed. However, in this case, an effect screen (FIG. 39B) indicating that acquisition has failed is always displayed.

  Further, at the time of JACKPOT production, the expected degree of acquisition may be indicated by, for example, display of a background or character, output of sound or sound effect, and the like.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, stock coin data is reset by lottery when the power is turned on or when a predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on. For this reason, even when an individual owns the slot machine 1, an inappropriate acquisition of coins by frequently repeating a game in a state after power-on, or a long time (for example, a normal game store) Inappropriate acquisition of coins due to a game of a time exceeding the available game time) can be prevented.

  Although the time from when the power is turned on until the stock coin data is reset can be set arbitrarily, it is preferable to set the time longer than the normal business hours of the amusement store (for example, 20 hours). If such a time is set, resetting of stock coin data during business hours (game time) is avoided, and the player is not discouraged or distrusted.

  Note that stock coin data may be reset at a predetermined time. Even in this case, inappropriate acquisition of coins due to a long game can be prevented. Even in this case, for the same purpose as described above, it is preferable to set a time that is not the normal business hours of the amusement store (for example, midnight).

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player selects “stock coin hint” within a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) after resetting the stock coin data, the stock coin storage area is set. Regardless of the value content of the stored stock coin data, one of the predetermined screens shown in FIGS. 30A to 30D is displayed. By doing in this way, it becomes difficult for a player to determine whether or not stock coin data has been reset, and it is possible to improve interest.

  Further, in the gaming system 1001 of the present embodiment, when the control unit 210 of the management server 1200 receives the simple start update request from the mobile terminal 1100, the control unit 210 lastly receives the simple start update request that updated the player database. Get time for each player. In addition, when the time per game based on the total number of games specified from the received update request and the acquired time is less than the set value (4.1 [seconds / game]), the control unit 210 It is determined that the total number of games is impossible in time. Then, when the total number of games is impossible within the time, the control unit 210 replies to the player's portable terminal 1100 without updating the player database based on the received simple start update request.

In this way, for example, even if a plurality of other players' game histories that have left the slot machine 1 without outputting a two-dimensional code are acquired in a short period of time and the game history is updated, the management server 1200 does not save time. It is possible to prevent the player database from being updated by determining that the number of games is impossible.
As a result, the gaming system 1001 of the present embodiment can appropriately update the player database by preventing fraud in which other players' gaming histories are acquired from a plurality of gaming machines in a short period of time.

  Further, in the gaming system 1001 of the present embodiment, the control unit 210 registers the received URL of the normal update request and simple start update request in the registration URL DB and the illegal URL DB. When the control unit 210 receives the same normal update request or simple start update request URL again, the control unit 210 determines that it is already registered in the registration URL DB or the illegal URL DB, and receives the received simple start request. A message to that effect is returned to the portable terminal 1100 without updating the player database based on the update request.

  In this way, the URL of the received normal update request or simple start update request is subjected to URL decoding processing, or it is determined whether the request is an illegal update request based on information specified from each decoded parameter. It is possible to decide whether or not to update the player database. As a result, the gaming system 1001 of the present embodiment can reduce the load for determining whether or not to update the player database.

  Further, in the gaming system 1001 of this embodiment, the management server 1200 generates synchronization update data based on the synchronization update data specification table, and can specify the generated synchronization update data according to the player's request. Issue a password containing data. Further, the slot machine 1 specifies the content of the synchronous update data corresponding to the specific data extracted from the input password based on the synchronous update data specification table, and is greater than or equal to the value stored in the specific data storage area. For example, the production mode is changed according to the value of the specific data.

  By doing in this way, the slot machine 1 can change the production mode based on the specific data at the timing when the input of the password from the player is accepted. As a result, the gaming system 1001 can change the effect mode more effectively than automatically changing the effect mode at a preset timing.

  In the gaming system 1001 of this embodiment, the management server 1200 and the slot machine 1 include RTCs 97 and 211, respectively, and acquire date / time data from the RTCs 97 and 211, respectively, and specify the day of the week from the date / time data. It is possible.

  In this way, the management server 1200 can generate synchronous update data having different contents for each day of the week based on the synchronous update data specification table and issue a password including the specific data of the generated synchronous update data. Further, if the password issued by the management server 1200 is input during the same day (the day of the week on which the synchronous update data is generated), the slot machine 1 can synchronize even if the password does not include data specifying the day of the week. Based on the update data specification table, the content and value of the synchronous update data can be specified from the extracted specific data, and the value of the specific data storage area can be updated.

  As a result, in the gaming system 1001 of this embodiment, the management server 1200 and the slot machine 1 can reliably update the synchronous update data based on the date / time data. In addition, the gaming system 1001 of the present embodiment can reduce the increase in the number of characters of the password by making the password not include data that can specify the day of the week, thereby making it troublesome for the player to input the password. It can reduce, and it can reduce that the interest of a game falls.

Further, in the gaming system 1001 of the present embodiment, independent data (“number of members”, “number of server accesses”, “number of times of mini game execution”) not related to the player history update data output by the slot machine 1 is synchronized. It is set as update data.
By doing in this way, the gaming system 1001 can make the player more interested in changing the effect mode than when independent data is not included in the synchronous update data.

In the gaming system 1001 of the present embodiment, when the player operates the checkout switch 10, the slot machine 1 displays a two-dimensional code (see FIG. 37) as a game history on the liquid crystal display 51.
In this way, the slot machine 1 does not fail to output the two-dimensional code when the player finishes the game if the player operates the checkout switch 10. As a result, it is possible to reduce a player's forgetting to acquire a game history, and to reduce a decrease in interest in the player's game due to forgetting to acquire a game history and not being able to update game information on the management server 1200, The interest of the game is improved by effectively using the acquired game history.

In the gaming system 1001 of this embodiment, when the player operates the checkout switch 10, the slot machine 1 not only displays a two-dimensional code but also displays a special notification message before displaying the two-dimensional code. Audio is output from the speakers 53 and 54.
By doing so, the slot machine 1 is informed that a two-dimensional code will be output if the player operates the checkout switch 10, so that the player forgets to acquire the game history is further reduced. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the production mode is changed by changing the production pattern of the demonstration production and enabling the execution of the premier production that has been set to be unexecutable. However, the method of changing the production mode is limited to this. For example, among the executable effects, the effect mode may be changed by changing the selection rate of the effect pattern having a high expectation level of the player (for example, increasing the selection rate).

  In addition, in this embodiment, the effect pattern of the demonstration effect is obtained by changing the effect mode even when the value of the specific data extracted from the password and the value of the specific data stored in the specific data storage area are the same value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only when the value of the extracted specific data is larger than the value of the stored specific data (the synchronous update data is updated). Only in the case of production) The production mode may be changed.

  As in this embodiment, the specific data value is stored in the specific data storage area for each content of the synchronous update data ("mission clear count", "number of members", ..., "mini game execution count"). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the value of the synchronous update data corresponding to the day of the week that is operating may be stored. In this case, the content of the synchronous update data is different from the value of the specific data extracted from the password input first when the day of the week is changed and the value of the specific data stored in the specific data storage area. For this reason, the process of step S2503 shown in FIG. 44 determines that the specific data extracted from the first input password after the change of the day of the week is a value that can be updated normally unconditionally, for the second and subsequent times, for example. It may be determined whether or not the value of only specific data extracted from the password input in is greater than or equal to the value of the stored specific data.

  In the present embodiment, when changing an effect pattern such as a demonstration effect, only the image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is changed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55 are turned on. Or a special effect of outputting sound from the speakers 53 and 54 may be executed together. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the effect mode has been changed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the content of the synchronous update data includes the “number of mission clears”, “number of members”, “maximum number of balls”, “maximum number of consecutive resorts”, “number of premier performances”, “number of server accesses ”,“ Mini game execution count ”, but is not limited to this, for example,“ Maximum Bonus Win Count ”, which is the maximum number of bonus wins among all registered players, “Maximum number of AT wins” that is the maximum number of AT wins among players, “Maximum number of AT games” that is the maximum number of consecutive games in the AT state among all players registered as members, Member “Maximum level” that is the maximum level of all registered players, “Maximum number of coins acquired” that is the maximum value of the number of coins acquired among all registered players, etc. It is. Also, it can be arbitrarily changed to which day of the week these contents are assigned.

  In this embodiment, the management server 1200 and the slot machine 1 synchronously update the seven types of synchronous update data that differ for each day of the week based on the synchronous update data specification table. The contents are not limited to different configurations for each day of the week. For example, the configurations may be different for morning / afternoon units (2 types), week units (5 types), month units (12 types), and season units (4 types). Further, for example, 14 types of synchronized update data may be updated in synchronization with the day of the week and AM / PM. In addition, when changing the number of types and unit of synchronous update data, it is necessary to change a synchronous update data specific table according to a change, or to add or change a corresponding production pattern.

  Note that in the gaming system 1001 of this embodiment, only when a simple start update request that makes it easier to obtain another person's two-dimensional code than when a normal update request is entered at the start of the game, the number of games cannot be reached in time. Although the player database is not updated, in the case of the normal update process, the player database may not be updated when a specific condition such as the total number of games that cannot exist in time is not satisfied. In addition, for example, when there is no password input at the start of the game, but there is an update request that requires obtaining a two-dimensional code at the start of the game and accessing the management server 1200 to notify that the game has started, The player database may not be updated when a specific condition such as the total number of games that cannot be included is not satisfied.

  As in the present embodiment, the control unit 210 of the management server 1200 acquires the reception date and time of the simple start update request, thereby reducing the information amount of the game history information included in the two-dimensional code, and the slot machine 1 Although it is preferable to reduce the load for generating the two-dimensional code, for example, the date and time when the player selects “Create two-dimensional code” and the date and time when the two-dimensional code is generated are included in the two-dimensional code. The unit 210 may acquire these dates and times.

  In the gaming system 1001 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the player database is updated based on a specific condition that it is not the total number of games that cannot be in time in the simple start update request. The specific condition may be that the number of times is not BB or RB.

  For example, in this embodiment, the process ends when the total number of medals paid out in the BB exceeds 480. Therefore, even if the “watermelon”, which is the small role with the maximum number of medals paid out (15), is continuously won. 480/15 = 32 [game] or more is required. As a result, in order to finish BB once, even if 16 games exceeding the limit value (14.63 games) are consumed in one minute, 32/16 = 2 [min] or more is required at the shortest. When BB exceeds 30 times (limit value set from the number of games required for BB) within one hour, the number of BBs that cannot be made in time may be set.

Also, for example, if the average time required for the player to finish the BB is tested and investigated in advance and the average time required for the BB is 5 minutes, the BB is required 12 times within 1 hour (required for the BB). If it exceeds the limit value set from the average time), the number of BBs that cannot exist within the time may be used.
Instead of the limit value set from the number of games required for BB or the limit value set from the average time required for BB, for example, a realistic number based on these limit values may be set.

  Furthermore, for example, if the probability of winning BB internally is 1/300, even if 16 games exceeding the limit value (14.63 games) in 1 minute are consumed, 60 × 16 × (1 /300)=3.2 [Times] will be won only. As a result, even if the variation from 3.2 times, which is the average value of the number of wins within one hour, is taken into consideration, it is unlikely that the number will be 9.6 [times], which is three times 3.2. Therefore, for example, when BB exceeds 10 times within 1 hour (the number of times that BB can be won within the time), the number of BBs that cannot be within the time may be set.

In addition, for example, it is a specific condition that the number of games until the internal winning of BB or RB determined based on the number of BB and RB and the total number of games is equal to or more than a preset threshold, or a series of BB and RB The specific condition may be that the number of wins (so-called consecutive number of times) is equal to or less than a preset threshold value. For example, if the probability of internally winning BB is 1/300, the probability of internally winning BB twice in a row is 1/90000. For this reason, the specific condition may be that the number of consecutive winnings of BB is 2 or less, and the number of consecutive winnings that is impossible when 3 or more.
That is, the specific game history included in the simple start update request is not limited to the total number of games, and may be, for example, the number of BB and RB.

  Note that, as in the management server 1200 of the present embodiment, the illegal update request URL and the player database that have not been updated are divided into the illegal URL DB and the registration URL DB, and the player database is updated normally. It is preferable to manage the URL of the update request separately. For example, instead of the registration URL DB and the illegal URL DB, both the normal update request URL and the illegal update request URL are registered. A URL database may be provided and managed collectively.

  In the above embodiment, a password is applied as information that can specify the game history to be input to the gaming machine (slot machine 1), and it is not necessary to provide a dedicated reading device or the like for inputting information from the outside. Although it can be said that it is preferable, it may be data such as a bar code or a two-dimensional code that can be read by a code reader provided in the gaming machine, or by wired connection, wireless connection, infrared connection, etc. Data that can be input to the gaming machine may be used. With such a configuration, the data can be easily input.

  In the above embodiment, a two-dimensional code is applied as information that can specify a game history output from the gaming machine (slot machine 1), and data can be easily obtained only by the player holding the two-dimensional code reader. Although it can be said that the data can be obtained, it may be output as other code data that can be read by a code reader such as a barcode, or data that can be output by wired connection, wireless connection, infrared connection, or the like. Further, a password may be applied in the same manner as information input to the gaming machine.

  In the above-described embodiment, only the mobile terminal 1100 to which terminal identification information is assigned and transmission of the terminal identification information is permitted is allowed to be accessed by the management server 1200. However, at least the mobile terminal 1100 is allowed to access. If the player can be identified by information (Cookie) that can be identified, or if the player can be identified by the player ID assigned on the management server 1200 side, A configuration may be adopted in which access from a portable terminal that is not permitted to transmit terminal identification information is permitted.

  In the above embodiment, the player information registered in the player database and the game history information registered in the game history database are managed using the terminal identification information as a key item, but the player can be identified. The player ID may be managed as a key item.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the above embodiment, the contents such as coin acquisition specifications between games (see FIG. 28A), stock coin stock specifications (see FIG. 28B), stock coin acquisition lottery conditions, etc. However, these are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to these contents. For example, in the coin acquisition specification between games, when a high level mission is achieved, all stock coins may be acquired. By doing in this way, a player's willingness to play can be raised and an interest property can be improved.

  Further, when there is no stock coin, a higher condition may be set for the player in coin acquisition between games (see FIG. 28A) than when there is a stock coin. In this case, for example, the types of coins acquired by the player may be ranked up (for example, gold or silver for copper and gold for silver). In this way, even if all the stock coins are acquired by the previous player at the end of the game (also known to the surrounding players by the JACKPOT production), the next player has a willingness to play. The game in the slot machine 1 can be started without lowering.

[Embodiment 2]
Next, a slot machine to which the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention is applied, a management server to which the management device according to the second embodiment of the present invention is applied, and a gaming system according to the second embodiment of the present invention comprising these management servers will be described. To do. Since the gaming system of the present embodiment has the same configuration as the gaming system 1001 of the first embodiment described above, the configuration different from the first embodiment will be mainly described here.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when a predetermined condition is established in a game using a function for storing a game history, the player is exchanged when receiving a predetermined privilege from the management server 1200. It was the structure which gives the coin (gold, silver, and copper) which is value. For this reason, the two-dimensional code output from the slot machine 1 includes acquired data as shown in FIGS. On the other hand, the slot machine of this embodiment does not have a configuration for giving coins. In the two-dimensional code output from the slot machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 (b) and 65 (c), instead of the acquired data, the game ends after entering the password or after selecting “easy start”. The medal difference number up to the time is stored.

  On the other hand, when receiving an update request (simple start update request, normal update request) from the mobile terminal 1100, the management server of the present embodiment gives it to the player based on the received game history update data and medal difference number. Determine the coin type and number. In this case, the management server indicates that the game has been ended with an advantageous game result if the game server has ended with a game result unfavorable to the player, such as a negative medal difference. The ratio of giving more coins (including the increase in the number of coins and the upgrade of the coin type) is higher than in the case of.

  In the gaming system 1001 of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the password issued by the management server 1200 starts from the lower 9 bits of the 35-bit value obtained by the conversion using the bit shuffle table. Up to the lower 16 bits showed the level. On the other hand, in the gaming system of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66, the lower 9 bits to the lower 11 bits indicate the day of the week, and the lower 12 bits to the lower 16 bits indicate the level. That is, in the present embodiment, 3 bits among the 8 bits assigned to the level in the first embodiment are assigned to the day of the week.

Therefore, the slot machine of this embodiment can extract not only the specific data but also the day of the week when the password is issued from the input password. As a result, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the day of the week is specified based on the date / time data acquired from the RTC 97 by the sub CPU 91a in step S2501 of the effect mode changing process shown in FIG. The machine does not need the same processing as in step S2501.
As a result, in the effect mode changing process of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, the process of step S2501 is omitted, and the sub CPU 91a is stored in the ROM 91c in place of step S2502, and the synchronous update shown in FIG. The process of step S2506 is performed to specify the content and value of the synchronous update data from the day of the week extracted from the password input based on the data specification table and the specific data.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the slot machine does not have to have a complicated function, and the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be expected. That is, even if the game is lost, the player can actively output a two-dimensional code and maintain the willingness to receive a privilege from the management server. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of the situation where the player leaves without outputting the two-dimensional code after the game is finished, and as a result, it can be expected to promote the utilization of the service provided by the gaming system.

  In this embodiment, the management server issues a password including the day of the week and specific data, and the slot machine extracts not only the specific data but also the day of the week on which the password was issued from the input password. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, even if the password issued from the management server is not input on the same day (the day of the week on which the synchronous update data is generated), the contents and values of the synchronous update data are extracted from the extracted specific data. It is possible to specify and update the value of the specific data storage area or change the production mode.

  Note that the management server may give points under higher conditions when the medal difference number indicates that the game has ended with a game result unfavorable to the player.

  In addition, as a modification of the present embodiment, the slot machine is configured not to calculate the total number of medals acquired by the player and the total number of medals inserted by the player during the game period, instead of the medal difference number. You may make it output by including in a code. In this case, the medal difference number may be obtained on the management server side by subtracting the total number of medals inserted by the player from the total number of medals acquired by the player.

[Embodiment 3]
In the third embodiment, a case where the slot machine 1 in the first embodiment described above is replaced with a pachinko gaming machine 700 will be described.

  First, an overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 700 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 68 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 700. FIG.

  The pachinko gaming machine 700 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 700 includes a glass door frame 702 formed in a frame shape that can be opened and closed in the game frame. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. And the board 706).

  A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 703 is provided on the lower surface of the glass door frame 702. On the upper surface of the hitting ball supply tray 703, a chance button 7111 is provided that is operated when a specific effect is executed in the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). The chance button 7111 corresponds to the effect switch 56 of the slot machine 1 described in the first embodiment.

  A selection button 112A that is operated when selecting various setting items as described with reference to FIGS. 29, 31, 32, and 37 on the front surface of the hitting ball supply tray 703 where the chance button 7111 is provided. , 7112B. The selection buttons 7112A and 7112B correspond to the stop switches 8L and 8R at the time of displaying the screen as shown in FIGS. 29, 31, 32, and 37 of the slot machine 1 described in the first embodiment.

  Under the hitting ball supply tray 703, there are an extra ball receiving tray 704 for storing game balls as game media that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 703, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 705 for emitting hitting balls (game balls). Is provided. A game board 706 (see FIG. 68) is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 702. The game board 706 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 707 is formed on the front surface of the game board 706 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down. A large number of nails for guiding a game ball are implanted in the game area 707.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 707, an effect display device 709 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided. In the effect display device 709, a change display (also referred to as a variable display, an update display, or a cyclic display) of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) synchronized with the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. The variation display of the effect symbol is executed in various variations such as scroll display and on-site switching display. The effect display device 709 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols (decorative symbols) as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each. In the effect display device 709, an effect symbol display area for displaying an effect symbol on the display screen is provided. For example, three (left, middle, right) of the effect symbol display area (plural) ) Has a symbol display area as a display area for variably displaying the effect symbols. Each of these three effect symbols is an effect symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. The effect display device 709 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variation control of the first special symbol is executed by the first special symbol display unit 708a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 709 to execute the effect display along with the variation display, and the second special symbol display unit 708a executes the second special display. When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 708b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device along with the variation display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  On the left side of the upper portion of the effect display device 709 in the game board 706, there is a first special symbol display (first variation display means) 708a that variably displays the first special symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. Is provided. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display 708a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of displaying the numbers 0 to 9 in a variable manner. In other words, the first special symbol display 708a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the right side of the upper portion of the effect display device 709 in the game board 706, there is a second special symbol display (second variation display means) 708b that variably displays a second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. Is provided. The second special symbol display 708b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the second special symbol display 708b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  In the present embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. In addition, the first special symbol display 708a and the second special symbol display 708b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) of 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 708a and the second special symbol indicator 708b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator. The first special symbol is subjected to the variable display on the condition that the second special symbol display unit 708b does not execute the variable display of the second special symbol. For the second special symbol, the variable display is executed on the condition that the first special symbol display unit 708a does not execute the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed without being variably displayed at the same time.

  For the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variation display is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 713 or the second start winning opening) 714), the display start condition of the variable display (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The game is started based on the fact that the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that winning means that a game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening (a game ball has entered). Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  In the following description, the fact that the game ball has won the first start prize opening 713 may be referred to as a first start prize, and the fact that the game ball has won the second start prize opening 714 will be referred to as a second start prize. There is a case. The data related to the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is held and stored as reserved storage data that is a right to perform variable display of the special symbol until the start condition is satisfied. Specifically, the on-hold storage data is stored in a predetermined area of a RAM 755 of a game control microcomputer 7560 described later. On-hold storage data for the first start winning is stored in the first on-hold storage buffer as first on-hold storage data with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as an upper limit, and on-hold storage data for the second start winning is stored in a predetermined number (for example, 4). Is stored in the second reserved storage buffer as second reserved storage data.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 700, a ball striking device for driving a driving motor in response to a player operating a ball striking operation handle 705 and launching a game ball to the game area 707 using the rotational force of the driving motor (see FIG. Not shown). A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 707 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 707, and then descends the game area 707. When the game ball enters the first start winning port 713 and is detected by the first start port switch 713a, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display unit 708a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 709 starts the variable display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol). Is done. That is, the change display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 713. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 714 and is detected by the second start port switch 714a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 2), the second special symbol display unit 708b starts the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 709 starts the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Is done. In other words, the variation display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 714. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The effect display device 709 is used for decoration (effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 708a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 708b. The effect design (decoration design) is displayed as a variation design. The change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 708a and the change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 709 are synchronized. Further, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 708b and the variation display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 709 are synchronized. Synchronous means that the start point and end point of variable display are substantially the same (may be exactly the same) and the period of variable display is substantially the same (may be exactly the same). In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 708a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 708b, the effect display device 709 causes the jackpot to be recalled. The combination of is stopped and displayed. The first special symbol display device 708a, the second special symbol display device 708b, and the effect display device 709 described above are variable display devices that display the variation of the identification information and derive and display the display result, and are used as a variation display unit. It is done.

  In the effect display device 709, when the variable display is started, for example, all of the left, middle, and right effect symbols start the variable display. Then, the left, middle, and right effect symbols that are variably displayed basically stop in a predetermined order (for example, a predetermined order such as the order of the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol, and the middle effect symbol). When a predetermined variation time has elapsed from the start of variation display, all the left, middle and right effect symbols are stopped and the display result is confirmed. The order in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols stop may be other than the order of the left, right, and center symbols. Further, the left, middle, and right effect symbols may be stopped simultaneously.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 713 is provided below the effect display device 709. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 713 is guided to the back of the game board 706 and detected by the first start opening switch 713a.

  A variable winning ball device (electric tulip) having a second starting winning port 714 (second starting port) through which a game ball can win is located below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 713. ) 715 is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 714 is guided to the back of the game board 706 and detected by the second start opening switch 714a. The variable winning ball device 715 is opened by a solenoid 716. When the variable winning ball device 715 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second start winning port 714 (it is easy to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second starting winning port 714 than the first starting winning port 713. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning port 714. Note that, in a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state, it may be configured such that although it is difficult to win, it is possible to win (that is, the game ball is difficult to win). As described above, the state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state may be a state where the game ball is difficult to win or does not win the second start winning port 714.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning port 713 and the second start winning port 714 may be collectively referred to as a start winning port or a starting port.

  When the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading toward the variable winning ball device 715 is very likely to win the second start winning port 714. The first start winning opening 713 is provided directly below the effect display device 709, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 709 and the first start winning opening 713 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The winning percentage of the second starting prize opening 714 is such that the nails are densely arranged around the area 713 and the arrangement of the nails around the first starting prize opening 713 is difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting prize opening 713. You may make it make higher than the winning rate of the 1st start winning opening 713.

  Below the first special symbol display 708a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 713, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start winning memory) 4 is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 718a composed of two displays (for example, LEDs) is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 718a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 708a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Below the second special symbol display 708b is a second special symbol hold comprising four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 714, that is, the second reserved memory number. A storage indicator 718b is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 718b increases the number of indicators to be turned on by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 708b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, the display screen of the effect display device 709 is provided with a first reserved memory display unit 718c that displays the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 718d that displays the second reserved memory number. (Each display area is provided). In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display unit for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, a variable winning ball device 715 that opens and closes only with respect to the second start winning opening 714 is provided, but the first starting winning opening 713 and the second start winning opening 714 are provided. Any of the winning openings 714 may be provided with a variable winning ball apparatus that performs an opening / closing operation.

  A reach state may occur during the effect symbol display on the effect display device 709. Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 709 constitute a part of the combination of jackpot symbols, the variation of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed continues. Or a display state in which all or a part of the effect symbols fluctuate synchronously while constituting all or part of a combination of jackpot symbols. In other words, reach means a state in which identification information constitutes a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least some of the variable areas are in variable display. In the present embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  The display effect in the reach state is reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, during the reach, an unusual effect may be performed with a lamp or sound. This production is called reach production. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect design, etc.)) or a display mode (for example, a color, etc.) of the background image of the effect display device 709 is displayed. ) May change. This change in character display and background display mode is called reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set such that when it appears, a big hit is more likely to occur than a normal reach (normal reach), and there is a high degree of reliability for the big hit. Such special (specific) reach is called super reach.

  As shown in FIG. 68, a special variable winning ball device 720 is provided below the variable winning ball device 715. The special variable winning ball apparatus 720 includes an opening / closing plate, and can be changed into an open state (first state) in which a game ball can be won and a closed state (second state) in which the game ball does not win. Device. Note that the special variable winning ball device 720 may be configured so that in the closed state, it is difficult to win, but it is possible to win (that is, it is difficult for the game ball to win). Thus, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 720 is in the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is difficult to win or does not win the special variable winning ball device 720.

  The special variable winning ball device 720 is a solenoid in a specific game state (a big hit game state) that occurs when a specific display result (a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 708a or the second special symbol display unit 708b. When the opening / closing plate is controlled to be in the open state by 721, the large winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. A game ball that has won a big winning opening is detected by a count switch 723.

  In the big hit gaming state, repeated continuous control is performed in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 repeats an open state and a closed state. In the repeated continuation control, a state where the special variable winning ball device 720 is opened is called a round. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, and when it is determined to be a jackpot, one of the jackpot types is selected. In this embodiment, the control example in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is opened only once in one round is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special variable winning ball is multiple times such as twice in one round. You may make it perform the control which makes the apparatus 720 an open state.

  A normal symbol display 710 (not shown) is provided below the effect display device 709. The normal symbol display 710 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 732 and is detected by the gate switch 732a, the display variation display of the normal symbol display 710 is started. In this embodiment, left and right lamps (designs can be visually recognized when lit) are alternately lit to perform variable display. For example, if the left lamp is lit at the end of variable display, it is a win. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 710 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol “◯”), the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is opened for a predetermined number of times. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 715 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 714). To change.

  In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 710, a normal symbol hold storage display 741 having four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 732 is provided. Every time there is a game ball passing through the gate 732, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 732a, the normal symbol hold storage display 741 increases the number of indicators to be turned on by one. Then, each time the variable symbol display on the normal symbol indicator 710 is started, the number of indicators that are lit is reduced by one. There are four upper limit values for the number of ordinary symbols stored, and the normal symbol storage memory display 741 lights the display with these four as upper limits.

  Decorative LEDs 725 flashing and displayed during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 707 of the game board 706, and an outlet 726 into which a hit ball that has not been won is taken in at the bottom. In addition, two speakers 727R and 727L that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 707. A top frame LED 728a, a left frame LED 728b, and a right frame LED 728c provided on the front frame are provided on the outer periphery upper portion, the outer periphery left portion, and the outer periphery right portion of the game area 707. For example, the top frame LED 728a, the left frame LED 728b, and the right frame LED 728c are related displays in the pseudo-continuous rendering as the repetitive variation pattern (each re-variation period (including the initial variation period) in one variation period). When an effect such that the effect is executed) is executed, blinking control is performed.

  The repeated variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a specific effect display is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times after a special symbol and an effect symbol change display is started and a display result is derived and displayed, and then a reach effect is executed. . Here, the specific effect display is, for example, an effect display such as an effect display that changes again, and if it is an effect display that can be repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times, for example, an effect display other than the re-variable display such as a notice display is possible. There may be. In the present embodiment, as an example of a repeated variation pattern, an example will be described in which a pseudo variation pattern that can be repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times with re-variation as a specific effect display is used.

  Here, the pseudo-ream is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed although it is a single fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for pseudo-continuous variation.

  In addition, the pseudo-ream is within the variation time determined with respect to one start winning prize in order to make it appear as if multiple symbols of variable display (variable display) have been executed for one starting winning prize. In this case, a special variation pattern (also referred to as a variation display pattern) in which temporary stop and re-variation are executed a predetermined number of times for all the symbol strings (left, middle, right). For example, as the number of re-variation repeated executions (also referred to as quasi-continuous re-variation times) increases, the reliability that is a big hit (the big hit is for all selection ratios including the big hit and the loss of big hit) The degree of the ratio that is sometimes selected, the ratio of the jackpot, that is, the reliability of the jackpot) increases. More specifically, the ratio selected when it is determined that the jackpot is high. In the pseudo-continuous variation pattern, a combination of symbols temporarily stopped in the effect display device 709 is called a temporary stop symbol combination. The combination of temporary stop symbols is determined as one of the pseudo consecutive chances among a plurality of types of chances (hereinafter referred to as pseudo continuous chances) composed of combinations of symbols other than the jackpot symbol combination. Further, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed, some reach effect may be executed as a final reach state.

  Also, a prize ball LED 751 that is turned on when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided in the vicinity of the left frame LED 728b, and a ball cut LED 752 that is turned on when the supply ball is cut is provided in the vicinity of the right frame LED 728c. . The top frame LED 728a, the left frame LED 728b, the right frame LED 728c, and the decoration LED 725 are an example of an effect light emitter provided in the pachinko gaming machine 700. In addition to the above-described various LEDs for production (decoration), LEDs and lamps for production are installed.

  Furthermore, in FIG. 68, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter referred to as a “paid card”) that is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and enables ball lending according to the value specified from the recorded information of the inserted prepaid card (recording medium). A card unit 810 is also shown. The card unit 810 includes a usable lamp indicating whether or not the card unit 810 is in a usable state, a connecting table direction indicator indicating whether the card unit 810 corresponds to the left or right pachinko gaming machine 700, and the card unit 810. A card insertion indicator lamp indicating that a card is inserted, a card insertion slot into which a card as a recording medium is inserted, a card return switch for returning a card inserted into the card insertion slot, and a card insertion slot A card unit lock is provided for opening the card unit 800 when checking the mechanism of the card reader / writer provided on the back surface. Here, the card return switch corresponds to the checkout switch 10. This card return switch corresponds to the settlement switch 100 of the slot machine 1 described in the first embodiment.

  Note that the card unit 810 may be installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 700 as a separate body from the pachinko gaming machine 700, or may be integrated with the pachinko gaming machine 700. Further, a game ball corresponding to the amount of money may be lent out in accordance with coin insertion.

  FIG. 69 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 731. As shown in FIG. 69 also shows a payout control board 737, an effect control board 780, and the like. A game control microcomputer 7560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 700 according to a program is mounted on the main board 731.

  The game control microcomputer 7560 includes a ROM 754 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 755 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 756 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O 757. In this embodiment, the ROM 754 and the RAM 755 are built in the game control microcomputer 7560. That is, the game control microcomputer 7560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the RAM 755 in addition to the CPU 756, and the ROM 754 may be externally attached or incorporated. Further, the I / O 757 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 7560 further includes a random number circuit 7503 for generating hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  In the game control microcomputer 7560, the CPU 756 executes control in accordance with a program stored in the ROM 754. Therefore, hereinafter, the game control microcomputer 7560 (or CPU 756) executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 756 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 731.

  The random number circuit 7503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to win a big hit based on the display result of the special symbol variation display. The random number circuit 7503 updates numerical data according to a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 7503 includes a numerical data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit selection setting function), a numerical data update rule selection setting function, and a numerical data update rule. It has various functions such as a selection switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 7560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 7503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using an ID number of the game control microcomputer 7560 (an ID number assigned to each product of the game control microcomputer 7560) stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 754. The numerical data obtained by the setting is set as an initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 7503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 7503 can be further improved.

  The game control microcomputer 7560 reads numerical data as random R from the random number circuit 7503 when a start winning to the first start port switch 713a or the second start port switch 714a occurs, and starts to change the special symbol and effect symbol Sometimes it is determined whether or not to make a jackpot display result as a specific display result based on the random R, that is, whether or not to make a jackpot display result. Then, when it is determined to be a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to a big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player.

  The RAM 755 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 755 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state by the game control microcomputer 7560 (special symbol process flag, value of each reserved memory number counter, etc.) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. Saved in. The data according to the control state by the game control microcomputer 7560 is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. is there. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 755 is backed up.

  A reset signal (not shown) from the power supply board is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 7560. A reset circuit that generates a reset signal supplied to the game control microcomputer 7560 and the like is mounted on the power supply board. When the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 7560 and the like are in an operable state, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 7560 and the like are in an operation stop state. Therefore, an allowable signal that allows the operation of the game control microcomputer 7560 or the like is output during a period in which the reset signal is at a high level, and a game control microcomputer in which the reset signal is at a low level. The operation stop signal for stopping the operation such as 7560 is output. Note that the reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling the electric parts is mounted).

  Furthermore, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board has dropped below a predetermined value is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 7560. That is, the power supply board monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC30V, DC5V, etc.) used in the gaming machine, and when the voltage value decreases to a predetermined value (the power supply voltage is reduced). A power supply monitoring circuit that outputs a power-off signal indicating that). Further, a clear signal (not shown) indicating that a clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 7560.

  Further, an input driver circuit for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 732a, the first start port switch 713a, the second start port switch 714a, the count switch 723, the general winning port switch 711, and the recovery path sensor 712 to the game control microcomputer 7560. 758 is also mounted on the main board 731. When the main board 731 receives the detection signals from the various switches, the main board 731 sends out a prize ball signal for executing a prize ball payout according to the various switches to the payout control board 737. When the payout control board 737 receives the prize ball signal, it drives the ball payout device 797 to pay out the prize ball according to the prize ball signal. Further, a prepaid card return operation signal (a signal at the time of a card return switch operation by a player) or the like is input to the payout control board 737 from the card unit 810 via the interface board 800.

  The general winning opening switch 711 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 706 and detects, for example, a game ball that has entered a general winning opening (not shown) that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. Switch. Based on the detection of the game ball by the general winning opening switch 711, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball.

  The collection passage sensor 712 is a transmissive optical sensor that is installed at a predetermined position in a common passage through which all game balls collected by the pachinko gaming machine 700 pass and detects the passage of the game balls.

  An output circuit 759 for driving a solenoid 716 for opening / closing the variable winning ball device 715 and a solenoid 721 for opening / closing the special variable winning ball device 720 forming a big winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 7560 is also provided. It is mounted on the substrate 731. Further, an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 731.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control means (configured by an effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 780 directs the contents of the effect from the game control microcomputer 7560 via the relay board 777. The control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 709 that displays the effect symbols in a variable manner is performed.

  In the present embodiment, an operation signal from the chance button 7111 is input to the effect control board 780, and the effect and the description according to the operation signal from the chance button 7111 are described with reference to FIGS. 29, 31, 32, and 37. Execute the decision operation on the selected screen.

  In the present embodiment, the production control board 780 receives operation signals from the selection buttons 7112A and 7112B, and FIGS. 29, 31, 32, and 37 according to the operation signals from the selection buttons 7112A and 7112B. The selection operation on the screen or the like described in the above is executed.

  In this embodiment, a return operation signal from the card unit 810 is input to the effect control board 780, and a special notification message voice output process and a two-dimensional code display process are performed when the specific effect mode is shifted according to the return operation signal. Is executed. Note that the game history output process at the time of returning the prepaid card in the effect control base 780 corresponds to the game history output process at the time of credit settlement shown in FIG. 49 of the first embodiment. Specifically, “sub CPU91b” is “microcomputer for effect control”, “settlement detection command” is “return operation signal”, “effect display 51” is “effect display device 709”, “speakers 53, 54”. Is replaced with “speakers 727R and 727L”, and the description is the same as the game history output process at the time of credit settlement shown in FIG.

  The effect control board 780 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer (not shown) including an effect control CPU and a RAM (both not shown). The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 780, the effect control CPU operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown) and receives a signal from the main board 731 input via the relay board 777. In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via an input driver and an input port (both not shown). Further, the effect control CPU causes a VDP (video display processor) (not shown) to perform display control of the effect display device 709 based on the effect control command.

  In the present embodiment, a VDP that performs display control of the effect display device 709 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer is mounted on the effect control board 780. The VDP has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer, and maps the VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. The VDP then outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 709.

  The effect control CPU reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM is for storing character image data displayed on the effect display device 709, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols) in advance. The effect control CPU outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP. The VDP executes display control based on data input from the effect control CPU.

  The production control CPU executes the production and determination of selection items on the screens of FIGS. 29, 31, 32, and 37 in accordance with the operation signal input from the chance button 7111. The effect control CPU executes selection of selection items on the screens of FIGS. 29, 31, 32, and 37 in accordance with the operation signals input from the selection buttons 7112A and 7112B.

  The effect control board 780 is connected to a power supply circuit (not shown), and the effect control CPU of the effect control board 780 has a power supply monitoring function for monitoring that power is supplied from the power supply circuit.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to an input driver (not shown) on the effect control board 780. The input driver allows the signal input from the relay board 777 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 780 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 780 to the relay board 777). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a means.

  Further, the effect control CPU outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 735 via an output port (not shown). Further, the effect control CPU outputs sound number data to the audio output board 770 via the output port.

  In the lamp driver board 735, a signal for driving the LED is input to an LED driver (not shown) via an input driver (not shown). The LED driver supplies a drive signal to each LED provided on the frame side such as the top frame LED 728a, the left frame LED 728b, and the right frame LED 728c. Further, a drive signal is supplied to the decoration LED 725 provided on the game board 706 side. When a light emitter other than the LED is provided, a drive circuit (driver) for driving the light emitter is mounted on the lamp driver substrate 735.

  In the voice output board 770, the sound number data is input to a voice synthesis IC (not shown) via an input driver (not shown). The voice synthesizing IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to an amplifier circuit (not shown). The amplifier circuit outputs to the speakers 727R and 727L an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by a volume (not shown). Further, control data corresponding to the sound number data is stored in a sound data ROM (not shown). The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data that indicates the output form of sound effects or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  The total number of games and the number of BBs (the number of RBs) in the gaming history of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above can be replaced with the total number of rotations and the number of big hits of the variable display of the effect display device 709 of the pachinko gaming machine 700. . In addition, the medal difference number calculated by the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment can be replaced with a game ball difference number obtained by subtracting the total number of game balls that have been thrown out from the total number of game balls that have been paid out. For example, the total number of game balls paid out can be calculated based on the detection results of the first start port switch 713a, the second start port switch 714a, the count switch 723, and the general winning port switch 711. Further, the total number of game balls that have been struck can be calculated based on the detection result of the collection passage sensor 712.

  As described above, the contents of the first embodiment can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 700. Similarly, the contents of Embodiment 2 can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 700.

  In the first and second embodiments, the gaming machine according to the present invention is configured by the slot machine 1 in which the gaming value (credit) by the player can be settled by the settlement switch 10, but the gaming value (gaming ball) It is also possible to configure with a pachinko gaming machine that can return the game. For example, in the configuration in which the card unit 810 or the like is omitted from the pachinko gaming machine 700 of the third embodiment, a sensor is provided in a mechanism for dropping the game ball from the hit ball supply tray 703 or the surplus ball receiving tray 704, and the game ball is dropped. When a message is detected, a voice output process of a special notification message or a two-dimensional code display process may be executed. Also, for example, when a counter that counts game balls (for example, a jet counter) is placed next to a pachinko gaming machine and connected to a pachinko gaming machine, and the counter detects that it has started counting game balls In addition, voice output processing of a special notification message or two-dimensional code display processing may be executed.

  In the third embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is configured by the pachinko gaming machine 700 that can return a medium (prepaid card) owned by the player with a card return switch, but the prepaid card is a card unit card. A slot machine that can be returned by a return switch can also be used. For example, the same configuration as the card unit 810 of the third embodiment may be connected to the slot machine 1 of the first and second embodiments.

  In the first to third embodiments, a gaming machine (slot machine 1 or pachinko gaming machine 700) that is installed in a game arcade and uses a gaming value (medal or gaming ball) by a player and the gaming machine output. The gaming system 1001 is configured by the portable terminal 1100 that reads the two-dimensional code and the accessible management server 1200. However, the gaming machine may be configured by a slot machine or a pachinko gaming machine that does not use gaming value. For example, a home game machine or other computer device that starts game software (slot machine game, pachinko machine game) such as a gaming machine simulator capable of acquiring a player's game history, an installed mobile application (slot machine application) It is also possible to configure a portable terminal that activates a pachinko gaming machine application as a gaming machine of the present invention.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention.

  1 slot machine, 1a chassis, 1b front door, 2 reel unit, 2L, 2C, 2R reel, 3 perspective window, 4 medal insertion part, 6 MAXBET switch, 7 start switch, 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch, 9 medal Payout exit, 10 settlement switch, 11 credit indicator, 12 game auxiliary indicator, 13 game display, 14-16 1-3 BETLED, 17 insertion request LED, 18 start valid LED, 19 wait LED, 20 replay LED , 21 BET switch valid LED, 22L, 22C, 22R Stop valid LED, 23 Reset switch, 24 Set value display, 25 Door open detection switch, 30 Flow path switching solenoid, 31 Insertion medal sensor, 32L, 32C, 32R Reel motor 33L, 33C 33R reel sensor, 34 hopper unit, 34a hopper tank, 34b hopper motor, 34c discharge sensor, 35 overflow tank, 35a full sensor, 36a stop switch, 36b automatic settlement switch, 37 setting key switch, 38 reset / setting switch, 39 Power switch, 40 game control board, 41 main control unit, 41a main CPU, 41b, 91b, 755 RAM, 41c, 91c, 754 ROM, 41d, 91d I / O, 42 random number generation circuit, 43 sampling circuit, 44, 96 Switch detection circuit, 45 Motor drive circuit, 46 Solenoid drive circuit, 47, 93 LED drive circuit, 48, 98 Power interruption detection circuit, 49, 95 Reset circuit, 51 Liquid crystal display, 51a, 51b Specific effect area 52 effect LED, 53, 54, 727R, 727L speaker, 55 reel LED, 56 effect switch, 90,780 effect control board, 91 sub control unit, 91a sub CPU, 92 display control circuit, 94 audio output circuit, 97 , 211 RTC, 100 power supply box, 101 power supply board, 110, 210 control unit, 120, 220 storage unit, 130, 230 operation unit, 140, 240 display unit, 150 wireless communication unit, 151 antenna, 160 camera unit, 250 communication , 700 pachinko machine, 702 glass door frame, 703 hit ball supply tray, 704 surplus ball tray, 705 hit ball operation handle, 706 game board, 707 game area, 708a first special symbol display, 708b second special symbol display , 709 Production display device, 710 Normal symbol table Indicator, 711 General winning opening switch, 712 Collection passage sensor, 713 First starting winning opening, 713a First starting opening switch, 714 Second starting winning opening, 714a Second starting opening switch, 715 Variable winning ball apparatus, 716 721 Solenoid, 718a First special symbol hold memory display, 718b Second special symbol hold memory display, 718c First hold memory display portion, 718d Second hold memory display portion, 720 Special variable winning ball device, 723 Count switch, 725 Decoration LED, 726 Out port, 728a Top frame LED, 728b Left frame LED, 728c Right frame LED, 731 Main board, 732 Gate, 732a Gate switch, 735 Lamp driver board, 737 Dispensing control board, 741 Normal symbol hold memory display Bowl, 751 prize LED, 752 LED, 756 CPU, 757 I / O, 758 input driver circuit, 759 output circuit, 770 audio output board, 777 relay board, 797 ball dispensing device, 800 interface board, 810 card unit, 900 Internet network, 1000 external output board, 1001 game system, 1100 portable terminal, 1200 management server, 7111 chance button, 7112A, 7112B selection button, 7503 random number circuit, 7560 microcomputer for game control.

Claims (4)

A gaming machine that enables a predetermined game using a game value by a player and that can output information including game history information related to the player's game history in a predetermined manner,
Game history output means for outputting information including the game history information in a predetermined manner in accordance with a predetermined end operation by the player;
Storage means for storing gaming values owned by the player;
A value return means for releasing the storage of the storage means in response to a predetermined value return operation by the player and returning the gaming value stored in the storage means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the game history output means outputs information including the game history information when the value for gaming is returned by the value return means. A game machine that enables a predetermined game using a game value by a player and that can output information including game history information related to the game history of the player in a predetermined mode and a storage medium owned by the player A lending device that outputs a gaming value lending request to the gaming machine using the valuable value,
The gaming machine is
A payout means for paying out game value in response to the loan request;
Game history output means for outputting information including the game history information in a predetermined manner according to a predetermined end operation by the player,
The lending device is
A medium return means for returning the storage medium in response to a predetermined medium return operation by the player;
The game system is characterized in that the game history output means outputs information including the game history information when the storage medium is returned by the medium return means. A gaming machine that enables a predetermined game using a game value by a player and that can output information including game history information related to the player's game history in a predetermined manner,
A payout means for paying out the game value in response to the lending request by the lending device that outputs the gaming value lending request to the gaming machine using the valuable value stored in the storage medium owned by the player;
Game history output means for outputting information including the game history information in a predetermined manner according to a predetermined end operation by the player,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming history output means outputs information including the gaming history information when the lending device returns the storage medium in response to a predetermined medium return operation by a player. In a storage medium owned by a player for a gaming machine that enables a predetermined game using a game value by the player and that can output information including game history information related to the player's game history in a predetermined mode A lending device that outputs a gaming value lending request using a stored valuable value,
In order for the gaming machine to output information including the game history information in response to a predetermined medium return operation by a player, the gaming machine includes medium return means for returning the storage medium in response to the medium return operation. Lending device to do.

Images